617a964b6191eeaffa9b0016518a49b26e4a1ca0
[gcc.git] / gcc / config / sparc / sparc.c
1 /* Subroutines for insn-output.c for SPARC.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
3 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 Contributed by Michael Tiemann (tiemann@cygnus.com)
5 64-bit SPARC-V9 support by Michael Tiemann, Jim Wilson, and Doug Evans,
6 at Cygnus Support.
7
8 This file is part of GCC.
9
10 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
12 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
13 any later version.
14
15 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
16 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
17 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
18 GNU General Public License for more details.
19
20 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
21 along with GCC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
22 the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
23 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */
24
25 #include "config.h"
26 #include "system.h"
27 #include "coretypes.h"
28 #include "tm.h"
29 #include "tree.h"
30 #include "rtl.h"
31 #include "regs.h"
32 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
33 #include "real.h"
34 #include "insn-config.h"
35 #include "conditions.h"
36 #include "output.h"
37 #include "insn-attr.h"
38 #include "flags.h"
39 #include "function.h"
40 #include "expr.h"
41 #include "optabs.h"
42 #include "libfuncs.h"
43 #include "recog.h"
44 #include "toplev.h"
45 #include "ggc.h"
46 #include "tm_p.h"
47 #include "debug.h"
48 #include "target.h"
49 #include "target-def.h"
50 #include "cfglayout.h"
51
52 /* 1 if the caller has placed an "unimp" insn immediately after the call.
53 This is used in v8 code when calling a function that returns a structure.
54 v9 doesn't have this. Be careful to have this test be the same as that
55 used on the call. */
56
57 #define SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P \
58 (!TARGET_ARCH64 && current_function_returns_struct \
59 && ! integer_zerop (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl))) \
60 && (TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl))) \
61 == INTEGER_CST))
62
63 /* Global variables for machine-dependent things. */
64
65 /* Size of frame. Need to know this to emit return insns from leaf procedures.
66 ACTUAL_FSIZE is set by compute_frame_size() which is called during the
67 reload pass. This is important as the value is later used in insn
68 scheduling (to see what can go in a delay slot).
69 APPARENT_FSIZE is the size of the stack less the register save area and less
70 the outgoing argument area. It is used when saving call preserved regs. */
71 static int apparent_fsize;
72 static int actual_fsize;
73
74 /* Number of live general or floating point registers needed to be
75 saved (as 4-byte quantities). */
76 static int num_gfregs;
77
78 /* Save the operands last given to a compare for use when we
79 generate a scc or bcc insn. */
80 rtx sparc_compare_op0, sparc_compare_op1;
81
82 /* Coordinate with the md file wrt special insns created by
83 sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue. */
84 bool sparc_emitting_epilogue;
85
86 /* Vector to say how input registers are mapped to output registers.
87 HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM cannot be remapped by this function to
88 eliminate it. You must use -fomit-frame-pointer to get that. */
89 char leaf_reg_remap[] =
90 { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
91 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, 14, -1,
92 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1,
93 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, -1, 15,
94
95 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
96 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47,
97 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,
98 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63,
99 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71,
100 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79,
101 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87,
102 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95,
103 96, 97, 98, 99, 100};
104
105 /* Vector, indexed by hard register number, which contains 1
106 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
107 function treatment. */
108 char sparc_leaf_regs[] =
109 { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
110 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0,
111 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
112 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1,
113 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
114 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
115 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
116 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
117 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
118 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
119 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
120 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
121 1, 1, 1, 1, 1};
122
123 /* Name of where we pretend to think the frame pointer points.
124 Normally, this is "%fp", but if we are in a leaf procedure,
125 this is "%sp+something". We record "something" separately as it may be
126 too big for reg+constant addressing. */
127
128 static const char *frame_base_name;
129 static int frame_base_offset;
130
131 static void sparc_init_modes PARAMS ((void));
132 static int save_regs PARAMS ((FILE *, int, int, const char *,
133 int, int, int));
134 static int restore_regs PARAMS ((FILE *, int, int, const char *, int, int));
135 static void build_big_number PARAMS ((FILE *, int, const char *));
136 static int function_arg_slotno PARAMS ((const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *,
137 enum machine_mode, tree, int, int,
138 int *, int *));
139
140 static int supersparc_adjust_cost PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, int));
141 static int hypersparc_adjust_cost PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, int));
142
143 static void sparc_output_addr_vec PARAMS ((rtx));
144 static void sparc_output_addr_diff_vec PARAMS ((rtx));
145 static void sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors PARAMS ((void));
146 static int check_return_regs PARAMS ((rtx));
147 static int epilogue_renumber PARAMS ((rtx *, int));
148 static bool sparc_assemble_integer PARAMS ((rtx, unsigned int, int));
149 static int set_extends PARAMS ((rtx));
150 static void output_restore_regs PARAMS ((FILE *, int));
151 static void sparc_output_function_prologue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
152 static void sparc_output_function_epilogue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
153 static void sparc_flat_function_epilogue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
154 static void sparc_flat_function_prologue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT));
155 static void sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT,
156 int));
157 static void sparc_nonflat_function_prologue PARAMS ((FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT,
158 int));
159 #ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
160 static void sparc_elf_asm_named_section PARAMS ((const char *, unsigned int));
161 #endif
162 static void sparc_aout_select_section PARAMS ((tree, int,
163 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT))
164 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
165 static void sparc_aout_select_rtx_section PARAMS ((enum machine_mode, rtx,
166 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT))
167 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
168
169 static int sparc_adjust_cost PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, rtx, int));
170 static int sparc_issue_rate PARAMS ((void));
171 static void sparc_sched_init PARAMS ((FILE *, int, int));
172 static int sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface PARAMS ((void));
173 static int sparc_use_sched_lookahead PARAMS ((void));
174
175 static void emit_soft_tfmode_libcall PARAMS ((const char *, int, rtx *));
176 static void emit_soft_tfmode_binop PARAMS ((enum rtx_code, rtx *));
177 static void emit_soft_tfmode_unop PARAMS ((enum rtx_code, rtx *));
178 static void emit_soft_tfmode_cvt PARAMS ((enum rtx_code, rtx *));
179 static void emit_hard_tfmode_operation PARAMS ((enum rtx_code, rtx *));
180
181 static bool sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall PARAMS ((tree, tree));
182 static void sparc_output_mi_thunk PARAMS ((FILE *, tree, HOST_WIDE_INT,
183 HOST_WIDE_INT, tree));
184 static bool sparc_rtx_costs PARAMS ((rtx, int, int, int *));
185 \f
186 /* Option handling. */
187
188 /* Code model option as passed by user. */
189 const char *sparc_cmodel_string;
190 /* Parsed value. */
191 enum cmodel sparc_cmodel;
192
193 char sparc_hard_reg_printed[8];
194
195 struct sparc_cpu_select sparc_select[] =
196 {
197 /* switch name, tune arch */
198 { (char *)0, "default", 1, 1 },
199 { (char *)0, "-mcpu=", 1, 1 },
200 { (char *)0, "-mtune=", 1, 0 },
201 { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
202 };
203
204 /* CPU type. This is set from TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT and -m{cpu,tune}=xxx. */
205 enum processor_type sparc_cpu;
206 \f
207 /* Initialize the GCC target structure. */
208
209 /* The sparc default is to use .half rather than .short for aligned
210 HI objects. Use .word instead of .long on non-ELF systems. */
211 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP
212 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.half\t"
213 #ifndef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
214 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP
215 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.word\t"
216 #endif
217
218 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP
219 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.uahalf\t"
220 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP
221 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.uaword\t"
222 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP
223 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP "\t.uaxword\t"
224
225 /* The target hook has to handle DI-mode values. */
226 #undef TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
227 #define TARGET_ASM_INTEGER sparc_assemble_integer
228
229 #undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
230 #define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE sparc_output_function_prologue
231 #undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
232 #define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE sparc_output_function_epilogue
233
234 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
235 #define TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST sparc_adjust_cost
236 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
237 #define TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE sparc_issue_rate
238 #undef TARGET_SCHED_INIT
239 #define TARGET_SCHED_INIT sparc_sched_init
240 #undef TARGET_SCHED_USE_DFA_PIPELINE_INTERFACE
241 #define TARGET_SCHED_USE_DFA_PIPELINE_INTERFACE sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface
242 #undef TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
243 #define TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD sparc_use_sched_lookahead
244
245 #undef TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
246 #define TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall
247
248 #undef TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
249 #define TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK sparc_output_mi_thunk
250 #undef TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
251 #define TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK default_can_output_mi_thunk_no_vcall
252
253 #undef TARGET_RTX_COSTS
254 #define TARGET_RTX_COSTS sparc_rtx_costs
255 #undef TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
256 #define TARGET_ADDRESS_COST hook_int_rtx_0
257
258 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
259 \f
260 /* Validate and override various options, and do some machine dependent
261 initialization. */
262
263 void
264 sparc_override_options ()
265 {
266 static struct code_model {
267 const char *const name;
268 const int value;
269 } const cmodels[] = {
270 { "32", CM_32 },
271 { "medlow", CM_MEDLOW },
272 { "medmid", CM_MEDMID },
273 { "medany", CM_MEDANY },
274 { "embmedany", CM_EMBMEDANY },
275 { 0, 0 }
276 };
277 const struct code_model *cmodel;
278 /* Map TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT to value for -m{arch,tune}=. */
279 static struct cpu_default {
280 const int cpu;
281 const char *const name;
282 } const cpu_default[] = {
283 /* There must be one entry here for each TARGET_CPU value. */
284 { TARGET_CPU_sparc, "cypress" },
285 { TARGET_CPU_sparclet, "tsc701" },
286 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite, "f930" },
287 { TARGET_CPU_v8, "v8" },
288 { TARGET_CPU_hypersparc, "hypersparc" },
289 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite86x, "sparclite86x" },
290 { TARGET_CPU_supersparc, "supersparc" },
291 { TARGET_CPU_v9, "v9" },
292 { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc, "ultrasparc" },
293 { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc3, "ultrasparc3" },
294 { 0, 0 }
295 };
296 const struct cpu_default *def;
297 /* Table of values for -m{cpu,tune}=. */
298 static struct cpu_table {
299 const char *const name;
300 const enum processor_type processor;
301 const int disable;
302 const int enable;
303 } const cpu_table[] = {
304 { "v7", PROCESSOR_V7, MASK_ISA, 0 },
305 { "cypress", PROCESSOR_CYPRESS, MASK_ISA, 0 },
306 { "v8", PROCESSOR_V8, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
307 /* TI TMS390Z55 supersparc */
308 { "supersparc", PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
309 { "sparclite", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE },
310 /* The Fujitsu MB86930 is the original sparclite chip, with no fpu.
311 The Fujitsu MB86934 is the recent sparclite chip, with an fpu. */
312 { "f930", PROCESSOR_F930, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU, MASK_SPARCLITE },
313 { "f934", PROCESSOR_F934, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE|MASK_FPU },
314 { "hypersparc", PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8|MASK_FPU },
315 { "sparclite86x", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU,
316 MASK_SPARCLITE },
317 { "sparclet", PROCESSOR_SPARCLET, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
318 /* TEMIC sparclet */
319 { "tsc701", PROCESSOR_TSC701, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
320 { "v9", PROCESSOR_V9, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9 },
321 /* TI ultrasparc I, II, IIi */
322 { "ultrasparc", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9
323 /* Although insns using %y are deprecated, it is a clear win on current
324 ultrasparcs. */
325 |MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS},
326 /* TI ultrasparc III */
327 /* ??? Check if %y issue still holds true in ultra3. */
328 { "ultrasparc3", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9|MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS},
329 { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
330 };
331 const struct cpu_table *cpu;
332 const struct sparc_cpu_select *sel;
333 int fpu;
334
335 #ifndef SPARC_BI_ARCH
336 /* Check for unsupported architecture size. */
337 if (! TARGET_64BIT != DEFAULT_ARCH32_P)
338 error ("%s is not supported by this configuration",
339 DEFAULT_ARCH32_P ? "-m64" : "-m32");
340 #endif
341
342 /* We force all 64bit archs to use 128 bit long double */
343 if (TARGET_64BIT && ! TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_128)
344 {
345 error ("-mlong-double-64 not allowed with -m64");
346 target_flags |= MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128;
347 }
348
349 /* Code model selection. */
350 sparc_cmodel = SPARC_DEFAULT_CMODEL;
351
352 #ifdef SPARC_BI_ARCH
353 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
354 sparc_cmodel = CM_32;
355 #endif
356
357 if (sparc_cmodel_string != NULL)
358 {
359 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
360 {
361 for (cmodel = &cmodels[0]; cmodel->name; cmodel++)
362 if (strcmp (sparc_cmodel_string, cmodel->name) == 0)
363 break;
364 if (cmodel->name == NULL)
365 error ("bad value (%s) for -mcmodel= switch", sparc_cmodel_string);
366 else
367 sparc_cmodel = cmodel->value;
368 }
369 else
370 error ("-mcmodel= is not supported on 32 bit systems");
371 }
372
373 fpu = TARGET_FPU; /* save current -mfpu status */
374
375 /* Set the default CPU. */
376 for (def = &cpu_default[0]; def->name; ++def)
377 if (def->cpu == TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT)
378 break;
379 if (! def->name)
380 abort ();
381 sparc_select[0].string = def->name;
382
383 for (sel = &sparc_select[0]; sel->name; ++sel)
384 {
385 if (sel->string)
386 {
387 for (cpu = &cpu_table[0]; cpu->name; ++cpu)
388 if (! strcmp (sel->string, cpu->name))
389 {
390 if (sel->set_tune_p)
391 sparc_cpu = cpu->processor;
392
393 if (sel->set_arch_p)
394 {
395 target_flags &= ~cpu->disable;
396 target_flags |= cpu->enable;
397 }
398 break;
399 }
400
401 if (! cpu->name)
402 error ("bad value (%s) for %s switch", sel->string, sel->name);
403 }
404 }
405
406 /* If -mfpu or -mno-fpu was explicitly used, don't override with
407 the processor default. Clear MASK_FPU_SET to avoid confusing
408 the reverse mapping from switch values to names. */
409 if (TARGET_FPU_SET)
410 {
411 target_flags = (target_flags & ~MASK_FPU) | fpu;
412 target_flags &= ~MASK_FPU_SET;
413 }
414
415 /* Don't allow -mvis if FPU is disabled. */
416 if (! TARGET_FPU)
417 target_flags &= ~MASK_VIS;
418
419 /* -mvis assumes UltraSPARC+, so we are sure v9 instructions
420 are available.
421 -m64 also implies v9. */
422 if (TARGET_VIS || TARGET_ARCH64)
423 {
424 target_flags |= MASK_V9;
425 target_flags &= ~(MASK_V8 | MASK_SPARCLET | MASK_SPARCLITE);
426 }
427
428 /* Use the deprecated v8 insns for sparc64 in 32 bit mode. */
429 if (TARGET_V9 && TARGET_ARCH32)
430 target_flags |= MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS;
431
432 /* V8PLUS requires V9, makes no sense in 64 bit mode. */
433 if (! TARGET_V9 || TARGET_ARCH64)
434 target_flags &= ~MASK_V8PLUS;
435
436 /* Don't use stack biasing in 32 bit mode. */
437 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
438 target_flags &= ~MASK_STACK_BIAS;
439
440 /* Supply a default value for align_functions. */
441 if (align_functions == 0
442 && (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
443 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3))
444 align_functions = 32;
445
446 /* Validate PCC_STRUCT_RETURN. */
447 if (flag_pcc_struct_return == DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN)
448 flag_pcc_struct_return = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 1);
449
450 /* Only use .uaxword when compiling for a 64-bit target. */
451 if (!TARGET_ARCH64)
452 targetm.asm_out.unaligned_op.di = NULL;
453
454 /* Do various machine dependent initializations. */
455 sparc_init_modes ();
456 }
457 \f
458 /* Miscellaneous utilities. */
459
460 /* Nonzero if CODE, a comparison, is suitable for use in v9 conditional move
461 or branch on register contents instructions. */
462
463 int
464 v9_regcmp_p (code)
465 enum rtx_code code;
466 {
467 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT
468 || code == LE || code == GT);
469 }
470
471 \f
472 /* Operand constraints. */
473
474 /* Return nonzero only if OP is a register of mode MODE,
475 or const0_rtx. */
476
477 int
478 reg_or_0_operand (op, mode)
479 rtx op;
480 enum machine_mode mode;
481 {
482 if (register_operand (op, mode))
483 return 1;
484 if (op == const0_rtx)
485 return 1;
486 if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
487 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
488 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 0)
489 return 1;
490 if (fp_zero_operand (op, mode))
491 return 1;
492 return 0;
493 }
494
495 /* Return nonzero only if OP is const1_rtx. */
496
497 int
498 const1_operand (op, mode)
499 rtx op;
500 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
501 {
502 return op == const1_rtx;
503 }
504
505 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point value with value 0.0. */
506
507 int
508 fp_zero_operand (op, mode)
509 rtx op;
510 enum machine_mode mode;
511 {
512 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op)) != MODE_FLOAT)
513 return 0;
514 return op == CONST0_RTX (mode);
515 }
516
517 /* Nonzero if OP is a register operand in floating point register. */
518
519 int
520 fp_register_operand (op, mode)
521 rtx op;
522 enum machine_mode mode;
523 {
524 if (! register_operand (op, mode))
525 return 0;
526 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
527 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
528 return GET_CODE (op) == REG && SPARC_FP_REG_P (REGNO (op));
529 }
530
531 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
532 be loaded into an integer register using a single
533 sethi instruction. */
534
535 int
536 fp_sethi_p (op)
537 rtx op;
538 {
539 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
540 {
541 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
542 long i;
543
544 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
545 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
546 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
547 return 0;
548 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
549 if (SPARC_SETHI_P (i))
550 return 1;
551 }
552
553 return 0;
554 }
555
556 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
557 be loaded into an integer register using a single
558 mov instruction. */
559
560 int
561 fp_mov_p (op)
562 rtx op;
563 {
564 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
565 {
566 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
567 long i;
568
569 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
570 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
571 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
572 return 0;
573 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
574 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
575 return 1;
576 }
577
578 return 0;
579 }
580
581 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
582 be loaded into an integer register using a high/losum
583 instruction sequence. */
584
585 int
586 fp_high_losum_p (op)
587 rtx op;
588 {
589 /* The constraints calling this should only be in
590 SFmode move insns, so any constant which cannot
591 be moved using a single insn will do. */
592 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
593 {
594 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
595 long i;
596
597 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
598 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
599 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
600 return 0;
601 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
602 if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (i)
603 && ! SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
604 return 1;
605 }
606
607 return 0;
608 }
609
610 /* Nonzero if OP is an integer register. */
611
612 int
613 intreg_operand (op, mode)
614 rtx op;
615 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
616 {
617 return (register_operand (op, SImode)
618 || (TARGET_ARCH64 && register_operand (op, DImode)));
619 }
620
621 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code register. */
622
623 int
624 fcc_reg_operand (op, mode)
625 rtx op;
626 enum machine_mode mode;
627 {
628 /* This can happen when recog is called from combine. Op may be a MEM.
629 Fail instead of calling abort in this case. */
630 if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
631 return 0;
632
633 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
634 return 0;
635 if (mode == VOIDmode
636 && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
637 return 0;
638
639 #if 0 /* ??? ==> 1 when %fcc0-3 are pseudos first. See gen_compare_reg(). */
640 if (reg_renumber == 0)
641 return REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER;
642 return REGNO_OK_FOR_CCFP_P (REGNO (op));
643 #else
644 return (unsigned) REGNO (op) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG < 4;
645 #endif
646 }
647
648 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code fcc0 register. */
649
650 int
651 fcc0_reg_operand (op, mode)
652 rtx op;
653 enum machine_mode mode;
654 {
655 /* This can happen when recog is called from combine. Op may be a MEM.
656 Fail instead of calling abort in this case. */
657 if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
658 return 0;
659
660 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
661 return 0;
662 if (mode == VOIDmode
663 && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
664 return 0;
665
666 return REGNO (op) == SPARC_FCC_REG;
667 }
668
669 /* Nonzero if OP is an integer or floating point condition code register. */
670
671 int
672 icc_or_fcc_reg_operand (op, mode)
673 rtx op;
674 enum machine_mode mode;
675 {
676 if (GET_CODE (op) == REG && REGNO (op) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
677 {
678 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
679 return 0;
680 if (mode == VOIDmode
681 && GET_MODE (op) != CCmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCXmode)
682 return 0;
683 return 1;
684 }
685
686 return fcc_reg_operand (op, mode);
687 }
688
689 /* Nonzero if OP can appear as the dest of a RESTORE insn. */
690 int
691 restore_operand (op, mode)
692 rtx op;
693 enum machine_mode mode;
694 {
695 return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && GET_MODE (op) == mode
696 && (REGNO (op) < 8 || (REGNO (op) >= 24 && REGNO (op) < 32)));
697 }
698
699 /* Call insn on SPARC can take a PC-relative constant address, or any regular
700 memory address. */
701
702 int
703 call_operand (op, mode)
704 rtx op;
705 enum machine_mode mode;
706 {
707 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
708 abort ();
709 op = XEXP (op, 0);
710 return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
711 }
712
713 int
714 call_operand_address (op, mode)
715 rtx op;
716 enum machine_mode mode;
717 {
718 return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
719 }
720
721 /* Returns 1 if OP is either a symbol reference or a sum of a symbol
722 reference and a constant. */
723
724 int
725 symbolic_operand (op, mode)
726 register rtx op;
727 enum machine_mode mode;
728 {
729 enum machine_mode omode = GET_MODE (op);
730
731 if (omode != mode && omode != VOIDmode && mode != VOIDmode)
732 return 0;
733
734 switch (GET_CODE (op))
735 {
736 case SYMBOL_REF:
737 case LABEL_REF:
738 return 1;
739
740 case CONST:
741 op = XEXP (op, 0);
742 return ((GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
743 || GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == LABEL_REF)
744 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) == CONST_INT);
745
746 default:
747 return 0;
748 }
749 }
750
751 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a symbolic memory
752 operand of mode MODE. */
753
754 int
755 symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode)
756 rtx op;
757 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
758 {
759 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
760 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
761 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
762 return 0;
763 op = XEXP (op, 0);
764 return (GET_CODE (op) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (op) == CONST
765 || GET_CODE (op) == HIGH || GET_CODE (op) == LABEL_REF);
766 }
767
768 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a LABEL_REF of mode MODE. */
769
770 int
771 label_ref_operand (op, mode)
772 rtx op;
773 enum machine_mode mode;
774 {
775 if (GET_CODE (op) != LABEL_REF)
776 return 0;
777 if (GET_MODE (op) != mode)
778 return 0;
779 return 1;
780 }
781
782 /* Return 1 if the operand is an argument used in generating pic references
783 in either the medium/low or medium/anywhere code models of sparc64. */
784
785 int
786 sp64_medium_pic_operand (op, mode)
787 rtx op;
788 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
789 {
790 /* Check for (const (minus (symbol_ref:GOT)
791 (const (minus (label) (pc))))). */
792 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST)
793 return 0;
794 op = XEXP (op, 0);
795 if (GET_CODE (op) != MINUS)
796 return 0;
797 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) != SYMBOL_REF)
798 return 0;
799 /* ??? Ensure symbol is GOT. */
800 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) != CONST)
801 return 0;
802 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 1), 0)) != MINUS)
803 return 0;
804 return 1;
805 }
806
807 /* Return 1 if the operand is a data segment reference. This includes
808 the readonly data segment, or in other words anything but the text segment.
809 This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9. These values
810 are accessed with EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG. */
811
812 int
813 data_segment_operand (op, mode)
814 rtx op;
815 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
816 {
817 switch (GET_CODE (op))
818 {
819 case SYMBOL_REF :
820 return ! SYMBOL_REF_FUNCTION_P (op);
821 case PLUS :
822 /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
823 Fall through. */
824 case CONST :
825 return data_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
826 default :
827 return 0;
828 }
829 }
830
831 /* Return 1 if the operand is a text segment reference.
832 This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9. */
833
834 int
835 text_segment_operand (op, mode)
836 rtx op;
837 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
838 {
839 switch (GET_CODE (op))
840 {
841 case LABEL_REF :
842 return 1;
843 case SYMBOL_REF :
844 return SYMBOL_REF_FUNCTION_P (op);
845 case PLUS :
846 /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
847 Fall through. */
848 case CONST :
849 return text_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
850 default :
851 return 0;
852 }
853 }
854
855 /* Return 1 if the operand is either a register or a memory operand that is
856 not symbolic. */
857
858 int
859 reg_or_nonsymb_mem_operand (op, mode)
860 register rtx op;
861 enum machine_mode mode;
862 {
863 if (register_operand (op, mode))
864 return 1;
865
866 if (memory_operand (op, mode) && ! symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode))
867 return 1;
868
869 return 0;
870 }
871
872 int
873 splittable_symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode)
874 rtx op;
875 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
876 {
877 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
878 return 0;
879 if (! symbolic_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
880 return 0;
881 return 1;
882 }
883
884 int
885 splittable_immediate_memory_operand (op, mode)
886 rtx op;
887 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
888 {
889 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
890 return 0;
891 if (! immediate_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
892 return 0;
893 return 1;
894 }
895
896 /* Return truth value of whether OP is EQ or NE. */
897
898 int
899 eq_or_neq (op, mode)
900 rtx op;
901 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
902 {
903 return (GET_CODE (op) == EQ || GET_CODE (op) == NE);
904 }
905
906 /* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator, but not an EQ, NE, GEU,
907 or LTU for non-floating-point. We handle those specially. */
908
909 int
910 normal_comp_operator (op, mode)
911 rtx op;
912 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
913 {
914 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
915
916 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
917 return 0;
918
919 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPmode
920 || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPEmode)
921 return 1;
922
923 return (code != NE && code != EQ && code != GEU && code != LTU);
924 }
925
926 /* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator. This allows the use of
927 MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns. */
928
929 int
930 noov_compare_op (op, mode)
931 register rtx op;
932 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
933 {
934 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
935
936 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
937 return 0;
938
939 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CC_NOOVmode
940 || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
941 /* These are the only branches which work with CC_NOOVmode. */
942 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
943 return 1;
944 }
945
946 /* Return 1 if this is a 64-bit comparison operator. This allows the use of
947 MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns. */
948
949 int
950 noov_compare64_op (op, mode)
951 register rtx op;
952 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
953 {
954 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
955
956 if (! TARGET_V9)
957 return 0;
958
959 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
960 return 0;
961
962 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
963 /* These are the only branches which work with CCX_NOOVmode. */
964 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
965 return (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCXmode);
966 }
967
968 /* Nonzero if OP is a comparison operator suitable for use in v9
969 conditional move or branch on register contents instructions. */
970
971 int
972 v9_regcmp_op (op, mode)
973 register rtx op;
974 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
975 {
976 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
977
978 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
979 return 0;
980
981 return v9_regcmp_p (code);
982 }
983
984 /* Return 1 if this is a SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND operation. */
985
986 int
987 extend_op (op, mode)
988 rtx op;
989 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
990 {
991 return GET_CODE (op) == SIGN_EXTEND || GET_CODE (op) == ZERO_EXTEND;
992 }
993
994 /* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can set
995 the condition codes explicitly. We do not include PLUS and MINUS
996 because these require CC_NOOVmode, which we handle explicitly. */
997
998 int
999 cc_arithop (op, mode)
1000 rtx op;
1001 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1002 {
1003 if (GET_CODE (op) == AND
1004 || GET_CODE (op) == IOR
1005 || GET_CODE (op) == XOR)
1006 return 1;
1007
1008 return 0;
1009 }
1010
1011 /* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can bitwise
1012 complement its second operand and set the condition codes explicitly. */
1013
1014 int
1015 cc_arithopn (op, mode)
1016 rtx op;
1017 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1018 {
1019 /* XOR is not here because combine canonicalizes (xor (not ...) ...)
1020 and (xor ... (not ...)) to (not (xor ...)). */
1021 return (GET_CODE (op) == AND
1022 || GET_CODE (op) == IOR);
1023 }
1024 \f
1025 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1026 signed 13 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1027 most 3 address instructions. */
1028
1029 int
1030 arith_operand (op, mode)
1031 rtx op;
1032 enum machine_mode mode;
1033 {
1034 if (register_operand (op, mode))
1035 return 1;
1036 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
1037 return 0;
1038 return SMALL_INT32 (op);
1039 }
1040
1041 /* Return true if OP is a constant 4096 */
1042
1043 int
1044 arith_4096_operand (op, mode)
1045 rtx op;
1046 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1047 {
1048 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
1049 return 0;
1050 else
1051 return INTVAL (op) == 4096;
1052 }
1053
1054 /* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub */
1055
1056 int
1057 arith_add_operand (op, mode)
1058 rtx op;
1059 enum machine_mode mode;
1060 {
1061 return arith_operand (op, mode) || arith_4096_operand (op, mode);
1062 }
1063
1064 /* Return true if OP is a CONST_INT or a CONST_DOUBLE which can fit in the
1065 immediate field of OR and XOR instructions. Used for 64-bit
1066 constant formation patterns. */
1067 int
1068 const64_operand (op, mode)
1069 rtx op;
1070 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1071 {
1072 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1073 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op)))
1074 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
1075 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1076 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
1077 && (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) ==
1078 ((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0 ?
1079 (HOST_WIDE_INT)-1 : 0)))
1080 #endif
1081 );
1082 }
1083
1084 /* The same, but only for sethi instructions. */
1085 int
1086 const64_high_operand (op, mode)
1087 rtx op;
1088 enum machine_mode mode;
1089 {
1090 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1091 && (INTVAL (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
1092 && SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1093 )
1094 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1095 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1096 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
1097 && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
1098 }
1099
1100 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1101 signed 11 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1102 the movcc instructions. */
1103
1104 int
1105 arith11_operand (op, mode)
1106 rtx op;
1107 enum machine_mode mode;
1108 {
1109 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1110 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM11_P (INTVAL (op))));
1111 }
1112
1113 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1114 signed 10 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1115 the movrcc instructions. */
1116
1117 int
1118 arith10_operand (op, mode)
1119 rtx op;
1120 enum machine_mode mode;
1121 {
1122 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1123 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM10_P (INTVAL (op))));
1124 }
1125
1126 /* Return true if OP is a register, is a CONST_INT that fits in a 13 bit
1127 immediate field, or is a CONST_DOUBLE whose both parts fit in a 13 bit
1128 immediate field.
1129 v9: Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1130 can fit in a 13 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode operand
1131 for most 3 address instructions. */
1132
1133 int
1134 arith_double_operand (op, mode)
1135 rtx op;
1136 enum machine_mode mode;
1137 {
1138 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1139 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
1140 || (! TARGET_ARCH64
1141 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1142 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
1143 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000)
1144 || (TARGET_ARCH64
1145 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1146 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
1147 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1148 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0x1000)
1149 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1150 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0))));
1151 }
1152
1153 /* Return true if OP is a constant 4096 for DImode on ARCH64 */
1154
1155 int
1156 arith_double_4096_operand (op, mode)
1157 rtx op;
1158 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1159 {
1160 return (TARGET_ARCH64 &&
1161 ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (op) == 4096) ||
1162 (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE &&
1163 CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 4096 &&
1164 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)));
1165 }
1166
1167 /* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub in DImode */
1168
1169 int
1170 arith_double_add_operand (op, mode)
1171 rtx op;
1172 enum machine_mode mode;
1173 {
1174 return arith_double_operand (op, mode) || arith_double_4096_operand (op, mode);
1175 }
1176
1177 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1178 can fit in an 11 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode
1179 operand for the movcc instructions. */
1180 /* ??? Replace with arith11_operand? */
1181
1182 int
1183 arith11_double_operand (op, mode)
1184 rtx op;
1185 enum machine_mode mode;
1186 {
1187 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1188 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1189 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1190 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x400) < 0x800
1191 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1192 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0x400)
1193 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1194 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0)))
1195 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1196 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1197 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x400) < 0x800));
1198 }
1199
1200 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1201 can fit in an 10 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode
1202 operand for the movrcc instructions. */
1203 /* ??? Replace with arith10_operand? */
1204
1205 int
1206 arith10_double_operand (op, mode)
1207 rtx op;
1208 enum machine_mode mode;
1209 {
1210 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1211 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1212 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1213 && (unsigned) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x200) < 0x400
1214 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1215 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0x200)
1216 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1217 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0)))
1218 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1219 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1220 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x200) < 0x400));
1221 }
1222
1223 /* Return truth value of whether OP is an integer which fits the
1224 range constraining immediate operands in most three-address insns,
1225 which have a 13 bit immediate field. */
1226
1227 int
1228 small_int (op, mode)
1229 rtx op;
1230 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1231 {
1232 return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op));
1233 }
1234
1235 int
1236 small_int_or_double (op, mode)
1237 rtx op;
1238 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1239 {
1240 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
1241 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1242 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1243 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
1244 }
1245
1246 /* Recognize operand values for the umul instruction. That instruction sign
1247 extends immediate values just like all other sparc instructions, but
1248 interprets the extended result as an unsigned number. */
1249
1250 int
1251 uns_small_int (op, mode)
1252 rtx op;
1253 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1254 {
1255 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > 32
1256 /* All allowed constants will fit a CONST_INT. */
1257 return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1258 && ((INTVAL (op) >= 0 && INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
1259 || (INTVAL (op) >= 0xFFFFF000
1260 && INTVAL (op) <= 0xFFFFFFFF)));
1261 #else
1262 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && (unsigned) INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
1263 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1264 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1265 && (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) - 0xFFFFF000 < 0x1000));
1266 #endif
1267 }
1268
1269 int
1270 uns_arith_operand (op, mode)
1271 rtx op;
1272 enum machine_mode mode;
1273 {
1274 return register_operand (op, mode) || uns_small_int (op, mode);
1275 }
1276
1277 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a call-clobbered register. */
1278 int
1279 clobbered_register (op, mode)
1280 rtx op;
1281 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
1282 {
1283 return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && call_used_regs[REGNO (op)]);
1284 }
1285
1286 /* Return 1 if OP is a valid operand for the source of a move insn. */
1287
1288 int
1289 input_operand (op, mode)
1290 rtx op;
1291 enum machine_mode mode;
1292 {
1293 /* If both modes are non-void they must be the same. */
1294 if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (op) != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
1295 return 0;
1296
1297 /* Accept CONSTANT_P_RTX, since it will be gone by CSE1 and result in 0/1. */
1298 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONSTANT_P_RTX)
1299 return 1;
1300
1301 /* Allow any one instruction integer constant, and all CONST_INT
1302 variants when we are working in DImode and !arch64. */
1303 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
1304 && ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1305 && (SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1306 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op))
1307 || (mode == DImode
1308 && ! TARGET_ARCH64)))
1309 || (TARGET_ARCH64
1310 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1311 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1312 && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
1313 ||
1314 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1315 (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1316 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
1317 #else
1318 (SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
1319 && (((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) == 0
1320 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)
1321 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1322 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0))
1323 #endif
1324 ))))
1325 return 1;
1326
1327 /* If !arch64 and this is a DImode const, allow it so that
1328 the splits can be generated. */
1329 if (! TARGET_ARCH64
1330 && mode == DImode
1331 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1332 return 1;
1333
1334 if (register_operand (op, mode))
1335 return 1;
1336
1337 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
1338 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1339 return 1;
1340
1341 /* If this is a SUBREG, look inside so that we handle
1342 paradoxical ones. */
1343 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
1344 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
1345
1346 /* Check for valid MEM forms. */
1347 if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
1348 {
1349 rtx inside = XEXP (op, 0);
1350
1351 if (GET_CODE (inside) == LO_SUM)
1352 {
1353 /* We can't allow these because all of the splits
1354 (eventually as they trickle down into DFmode
1355 splits) require offsettable memory references. */
1356 if (! TARGET_V9
1357 && GET_MODE (op) == TFmode)
1358 return 0;
1359
1360 return (register_operand (XEXP (inside, 0), Pmode)
1361 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (inside, 1)));
1362 }
1363 return memory_address_p (mode, inside);
1364 }
1365
1366 return 0;
1367 }
1368
1369 \f
1370 /* We know it can't be done in one insn when we get here,
1371 the movsi expander guarantees this. */
1372 void
1373 sparc_emit_set_const32 (op0, op1)
1374 rtx op0;
1375 rtx op1;
1376 {
1377 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
1378 rtx temp;
1379
1380 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
1381 {
1382 HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (op1);
1383
1384 if (SPARC_SETHI_P (value & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1385 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (value))
1386 abort ();
1387 }
1388
1389 /* Full 2-insn decomposition is needed. */
1390 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1391 temp = op0;
1392 else
1393 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1394
1395 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
1396 {
1397 /* Emit them as real moves instead of a HIGH/LO_SUM,
1398 this way CSE can see everything and reuse intermediate
1399 values if it wants. */
1400 if (TARGET_ARCH64
1401 && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
1402 && (INTVAL (op1) & 0x80000000) != 0)
1403 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET
1404 (VOIDmode, temp,
1405 immed_double_const (INTVAL (op1) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff,
1406 0, DImode)));
1407 else
1408 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
1409 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1)
1410 & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)));
1411
1412 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1413 op0,
1414 gen_rtx_IOR (mode, temp,
1415 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) & 0x3ff))));
1416 }
1417 else
1418 {
1419 /* A symbol, emit in the traditional way. */
1420 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
1421 gen_rtx_HIGH (mode, op1)));
1422 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1423 op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (mode, temp, op1)));
1424
1425 }
1426 }
1427
1428 \f
1429 /* SPARC-v9 code-model support. */
1430 void
1431 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (op0, op1, temp1)
1432 rtx op0;
1433 rtx op1;
1434 rtx temp1;
1435 {
1436 rtx ti_temp1 = 0;
1437
1438 if (temp1 && GET_MODE (temp1) == TImode)
1439 {
1440 ti_temp1 = temp1;
1441 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1));
1442 }
1443
1444 switch (sparc_cmodel)
1445 {
1446 case CM_MEDLOW:
1447 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1448 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1449 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1450 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1451
1452 The executable must be in the low 4TB of the virtual address
1453 space.
1454
1455 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp
1456 or %temp, %lo(symbol), %reg */
1457 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1, gen_rtx_HIGH (DImode, op1)));
1458 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (DImode, temp1, op1)));
1459 break;
1460
1461 case CM_MEDMID:
1462 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1463 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1464 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1465 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1466
1467 The executable must be in the low 16TB of the virtual address
1468 space.
1469
1470 sethi %h44(symbol), %temp1
1471 or %temp1, %m44(symbol), %temp2
1472 sllx %temp2, 12, %temp3
1473 or %temp3, %l44(symbol), %reg */
1474 emit_insn (gen_seth44 (op0, op1));
1475 emit_insn (gen_setm44 (op0, op0, op1));
1476 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1,
1477 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (12))));
1478 emit_insn (gen_setl44 (op0, temp1, op1));
1479 break;
1480
1481 case CM_MEDANY:
1482 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1483 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1484 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1485 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1486
1487 The executable can be placed anywhere in the virtual address
1488 space.
1489
1490 sethi %hh(symbol), %temp1
1491 sethi %lm(symbol), %temp2
1492 or %temp1, %hm(symbol), %temp3
1493 or %temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
1494 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp5
1495 or %temp4, %temp5, %reg */
1496
1497 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
1498 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
1499 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */
1500 if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
1501 {
1502 if (ti_temp1)
1503 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
1504 else
1505 abort();
1506 }
1507
1508 emit_insn (gen_sethh (op0, op1));
1509 emit_insn (gen_setlm (temp1, op1));
1510 emit_insn (gen_sethm (op0, op0, op1));
1511 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1512 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
1513 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1514 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
1515 emit_insn (gen_setlo (op0, op0, op1));
1516 break;
1517
1518 case CM_EMBMEDANY:
1519 /* Old old old backwards compatibility kruft here.
1520 Essentially it is MEDLOW with a fixed 64-bit
1521 virtual base added to all data segment addresses.
1522 Text-segment stuff is computed like MEDANY, we can't
1523 reuse the code above because the relocation knobs
1524 look different.
1525
1526 Data segment: sethi %hi(symbol), %temp1
1527 or %temp1, %lo(symbol), %temp2
1528 add %temp2, EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, %reg
1529
1530 Text segment: sethi %uhi(symbol), %temp1
1531 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp2
1532 or %temp1, %ulo(symbol), %temp3
1533 or %temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
1534 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp5
1535 or %temp4, %temp5, %reg */
1536 if (data_segment_operand (op1, GET_MODE (op1)))
1537 {
1538 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_sethi (temp1, op1));
1539 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_brsum (op0, temp1));
1540 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_losum (op0, op0, op1));
1541 }
1542 else
1543 {
1544 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
1545 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
1546 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */
1547 if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
1548 {
1549 if (ti_temp1)
1550 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
1551 else
1552 abort();
1553 }
1554
1555 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textuhi (op0, op1));
1556 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_texthi (temp1, op1));
1557 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textulo (op0, op0, op1));
1558 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1559 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
1560 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1561 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
1562 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textlo (op0, op0, op1));
1563 }
1564 break;
1565
1566 default:
1567 abort();
1568 }
1569 }
1570
1571 /* These avoid problems when cross compiling. If we do not
1572 go through all this hair then the optimizer will see
1573 invalid REG_EQUAL notes or in some cases none at all. */
1574 static void sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1575 static rtx gen_safe_SET64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1576 static rtx gen_safe_OR64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1577 static rtx gen_safe_XOR64 PARAMS ((rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT));
1578
1579 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1580 #define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x) GEN_INT ((__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)
1581 #define GEN_INT64(__x) GEN_INT (__x)
1582 #else
1583 #define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x) \
1584 immed_double_const ((__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff, 0, DImode)
1585 #define GEN_INT64(__x) \
1586 immed_double_const ((__x) & 0xffffffff, \
1587 ((__x) & 0x80000000 ? -1 : 0), DImode)
1588 #endif
1589
1590 /* The optimizer is not to assume anything about exactly
1591 which bits are set for a HIGH, they are unspecified.
1592 Unfortunately this leads to many missed optimizations
1593 during CSE. We mask out the non-HIGH bits, and matches
1594 a plain movdi, to alleviate this problem. */
1595 static void
1596 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (dest, val)
1597 rtx dest;
1598 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1599 {
1600 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_HIGHINT64 (val)));
1601 }
1602
1603 static rtx
1604 gen_safe_SET64 (dest, val)
1605 rtx dest;
1606 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1607 {
1608 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_INT64 (val));
1609 }
1610
1611 static rtx
1612 gen_safe_OR64 (src, val)
1613 rtx src;
1614 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1615 {
1616 return gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
1617 }
1618
1619 static rtx
1620 gen_safe_XOR64 (src, val)
1621 rtx src;
1622 HOST_WIDE_INT val;
1623 {
1624 return gen_rtx_XOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
1625 }
1626
1627 /* Worker routines for 64-bit constant formation on arch64.
1628 One of the key things to be doing in these emissions is
1629 to create as many temp REGs as possible. This makes it
1630 possible for half-built constants to be used later when
1631 such values are similar to something required later on.
1632 Without doing this, the optimizer cannot see such
1633 opportunities. */
1634
1635 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1
1636 PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int));
1637
1638 static void
1639 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (op0, temp, low_bits, is_neg)
1640 rtx op0;
1641 rtx temp;
1642 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits;
1643 int is_neg;
1644 {
1645 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;
1646
1647 if (is_neg)
1648 high_bits = (~low_bits) & 0xffffffff;
1649 else
1650 high_bits = low_bits;
1651
1652 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1653 if (!is_neg)
1654 {
1655 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1656 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1657 }
1658 else
1659 {
1660 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
1661 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations
1662 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */
1663 if ((low_bits & 0x3ff) == 0x3ff)
1664 {
1665 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1666 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
1667 }
1668 else
1669 {
1670 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1671 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
1672 (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x400
1673 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)))));
1674 }
1675 }
1676 }
1677
1678 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2
1679 PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1680 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int));
1681
1682 static void
1683 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, low_immediate, shift_count)
1684 rtx op0;
1685 rtx temp;
1686 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;
1687 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_immediate;
1688 int shift_count;
1689 {
1690 rtx temp2 = op0;
1691
1692 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
1693 {
1694 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1695 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1696 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1697 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1698 else
1699 temp2 = temp;
1700 }
1701 else
1702 {
1703 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
1704 temp2 = temp;
1705 }
1706
1707 /* Now shift it up into place. */
1708 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1709 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp2,
1710 GEN_INT (shift_count))));
1711
1712 /* If there is a low immediate part piece, finish up by
1713 putting that in as well. */
1714 if (low_immediate != 0)
1715 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1716 gen_safe_OR64 (op0, low_immediate)));
1717 }
1718
1719 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_longway
1720 PARAMS ((rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT));
1721
1722 /* Full 64-bit constant decomposition. Even though this is the
1723 'worst' case, we still optimize a few things away. */
1724 static void
1725 sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits)
1726 rtx op0;
1727 rtx temp;
1728 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;
1729 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits;
1730 {
1731 rtx sub_temp;
1732
1733 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1734 sub_temp = op0;
1735 else
1736 sub_temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1737
1738 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
1739 {
1740 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1741 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1742 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1743 sub_temp,
1744 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1745 else
1746 sub_temp = temp;
1747 }
1748 else
1749 {
1750 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
1751 sub_temp = temp;
1752 }
1753
1754 if (!reload_in_progress && !reload_completed)
1755 {
1756 rtx temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1757 rtx temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1758 rtx temp4 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1759
1760 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp4,
1761 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1762 GEN_INT (32))));
1763
1764 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp2, low_bits);
1765 if ((low_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1766 {
1767 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp3,
1768 gen_safe_OR64 (temp2, (low_bits & 0x3ff))));
1769 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1770 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp3)));
1771 }
1772 else
1773 {
1774 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1775 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp2)));
1776 }
1777 }
1778 else
1779 {
1780 rtx low1 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12)) & 0xfff);
1781 rtx low2 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12)) & 0xfff);
1782 rtx low3 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12 - 8)) & 0x0ff);
1783 int to_shift = 12;
1784
1785 /* We are in the middle of reload, so this is really
1786 painful. However we do still make an attempt to
1787 avoid emitting truly stupid code. */
1788 if (low1 != const0_rtx)
1789 {
1790 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1791 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1792 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1793 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1794 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low1)));
1795 sub_temp = op0;
1796 to_shift = 12;
1797 }
1798 else
1799 {
1800 to_shift += 12;
1801 }
1802 if (low2 != const0_rtx)
1803 {
1804 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1805 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1806 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1807 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1808 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low2)));
1809 sub_temp = op0;
1810 to_shift = 8;
1811 }
1812 else
1813 {
1814 to_shift += 8;
1815 }
1816 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1817 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1818 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1819 if (low3 != const0_rtx)
1820 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1821 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low3)));
1822 /* phew... */
1823 }
1824 }
1825
1826 /* Analyze a 64-bit constant for certain properties. */
1827 static void analyze_64bit_constant
1828 PARAMS ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1829 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1830 int *, int *, int *));
1831
1832 static void
1833 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits, hbsp, lbsp, abbasp)
1834 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1835 int *hbsp, *lbsp, *abbasp;
1836 {
1837 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;
1838 int i;
1839
1840 lowest_bit_set = highest_bit_set = -1;
1841 i = 0;
1842 do
1843 {
1844 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
1845 && ((low_bits >> i) & 1))
1846 lowest_bit_set = i;
1847 if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1848 && ((high_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
1849 highest_bit_set = (64 - i - 1);
1850 }
1851 while (++i < 32
1852 && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1853 || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
1854 if (i == 32)
1855 {
1856 i = 0;
1857 do
1858 {
1859 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
1860 && ((high_bits >> i) & 1))
1861 lowest_bit_set = i + 32;
1862 if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1863 && ((low_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
1864 highest_bit_set = 32 - i - 1;
1865 }
1866 while (++i < 32
1867 && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1868 || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
1869 }
1870 /* If there are no bits set this should have gone out
1871 as one instruction! */
1872 if (lowest_bit_set == -1
1873 || highest_bit_set == -1)
1874 abort ();
1875 all_bits_between_are_set = 1;
1876 for (i = lowest_bit_set; i <= highest_bit_set; i++)
1877 {
1878 if (i < 32)
1879 {
1880 if ((low_bits & (1 << i)) != 0)
1881 continue;
1882 }
1883 else
1884 {
1885 if ((high_bits & (1 << (i - 32))) != 0)
1886 continue;
1887 }
1888 all_bits_between_are_set = 0;
1889 break;
1890 }
1891 *hbsp = highest_bit_set;
1892 *lbsp = lowest_bit_set;
1893 *abbasp = all_bits_between_are_set;
1894 }
1895
1896 static int const64_is_2insns
1897 PARAMS ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT));
1898
1899 static int
1900 const64_is_2insns (high_bits, low_bits)
1901 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1902 {
1903 int highest_bit_set, lowest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;
1904
1905 if (high_bits == 0
1906 || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
1907 return 1;
1908
1909 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
1910 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
1911 &all_bits_between_are_set);
1912
1913 if ((highest_bit_set == 63
1914 || lowest_bit_set == 0)
1915 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
1916 return 1;
1917
1918 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
1919 return 1;
1920
1921 return 0;
1922 }
1923
1924 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT create_simple_focus_bits
1925 PARAMS ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1926 int, int));
1927
1928 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1929 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits, lowest_bit_set, shift)
1930 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1931 int lowest_bit_set, shift;
1932 {
1933 HOST_WIDE_INT hi, lo;
1934
1935 if (lowest_bit_set < 32)
1936 {
1937 lo = (low_bits >> lowest_bit_set) << shift;
1938 hi = ((high_bits << (32 - lowest_bit_set)) << shift);
1939 }
1940 else
1941 {
1942 lo = 0;
1943 hi = ((high_bits >> (lowest_bit_set - 32)) << shift);
1944 }
1945 if (hi & lo)
1946 abort ();
1947 return (hi | lo);
1948 }
1949
1950 /* Here we are sure to be arch64 and this is an integer constant
1951 being loaded into a register. Emit the most efficient
1952 insn sequence possible. Detection of all the 1-insn cases
1953 has been done already. */
1954 void
1955 sparc_emit_set_const64 (op0, op1)
1956 rtx op0;
1957 rtx op1;
1958 {
1959 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1960 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set;
1961 int all_bits_between_are_set;
1962 rtx temp;
1963
1964 /* Sanity check that we know what we are working with. */
1965 if (! TARGET_ARCH64)
1966 abort ();
1967
1968 if (GET_CODE (op0) != SUBREG)
1969 {
1970 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG
1971 || (REGNO (op0) >= SPARC_FIRST_FP_REG
1972 && REGNO (op0) <= SPARC_LAST_V9_FP_REG))
1973 abort ();
1974 }
1975
1976 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1977 temp = op0;
1978 else
1979 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1980
1981 if (GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
1982 && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT)
1983 {
1984 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (op0, op1, temp);
1985 return;
1986 }
1987
1988 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1989 {
1990 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1991 high_bits = (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff;
1992 low_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) & 0xffffffff;
1993 #else
1994 high_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
1995 low_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1);
1996 #endif
1997 }
1998 else
1999 {
2000 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
2001 high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff);
2002 low_bits = (INTVAL (op1) & 0xffffffff);
2003 #else
2004 high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) < 0) ?
2005 0xffffffff :
2006 0x00000000);
2007 low_bits = INTVAL (op1);
2008 #endif
2009 }
2010
2011 /* low_bits bits 0 --> 31
2012 high_bits bits 32 --> 63 */
2013
2014 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
2015 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
2016 &all_bits_between_are_set);
2017
2018 /* First try for a 2-insn sequence. */
2019
2020 /* These situations are preferred because the optimizer can
2021 * do more things with them:
2022 * 1) mov -1, %reg
2023 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
2024 * 2) mov -1, %reg
2025 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg
2026 * 3) mov some_small_const, %reg
2027 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
2028 */
2029 if (((highest_bit_set == 63
2030 || lowest_bit_set == 0)
2031 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
2032 || ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 12))
2033 {
2034 HOST_WIDE_INT the_const = -1;
2035 int shift = lowest_bit_set;
2036
2037 if ((highest_bit_set != 63
2038 && lowest_bit_set != 0)
2039 || all_bits_between_are_set == 0)
2040 {
2041 the_const =
2042 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2043 lowest_bit_set, 0);
2044 }
2045 else if (lowest_bit_set == 0)
2046 shift = -(63 - highest_bit_set);
2047
2048 if (! SPARC_SIMM13_P (the_const))
2049 abort ();
2050
2051 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, the_const));
2052 if (shift > 0)
2053 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2054 op0,
2055 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode,
2056 temp,
2057 GEN_INT (shift))));
2058 else if (shift < 0)
2059 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2060 op0,
2061 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode,
2062 temp,
2063 GEN_INT (-shift))));
2064 else
2065 abort ();
2066 return;
2067 }
2068
2069 /* Now a range of 22 or less bits set somewhere.
2070 * 1) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg
2071 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
2072 * 2) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg
2073 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg
2074 */
2075 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
2076 {
2077 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
2078 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2079 lowest_bit_set, 10);
2080
2081 if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (focus_bits))
2082 abort ();
2083
2084 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, focus_bits);
2085
2086 /* If lowest_bit_set == 10 then a sethi alone could have done it. */
2087 if (lowest_bit_set < 10)
2088 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2089 op0,
2090 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode, temp,
2091 GEN_INT (10 - lowest_bit_set))));
2092 else if (lowest_bit_set > 10)
2093 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2094 op0,
2095 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp,
2096 GEN_INT (lowest_bit_set - 10))));
2097 else
2098 abort ();
2099 return;
2100 }
2101
2102 /* 1) sethi %hi(low_bits), %reg
2103 * or %reg, %lo(low_bits), %reg
2104 * 2) sethi %hi(~low_bits), %reg
2105 * xor %reg, %lo(-0x400 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)), %reg
2106 */
2107 if (high_bits == 0
2108 || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
2109 {
2110 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (op0, temp, low_bits,
2111 (high_bits == 0xffffffff));
2112 return;
2113 }
2114
2115 /* Now, try 3-insn sequences. */
2116
2117 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg
2118 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
2119 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg
2120 */
2121 if (low_bits == 0)
2122 {
2123 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, 0, 32);
2124 return;
2125 }
2126
2127 /* We may be able to do something quick
2128 when the constant is negated, so try that. */
2129 if (const64_is_2insns ((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff,
2130 (~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00))
2131 {
2132 /* NOTE: The trailing bits get XOR'd so we need the
2133 non-negated bits, not the negated ones. */
2134 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT trailing_bits = low_bits & 0x3ff;
2135
2136 if ((((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0
2137 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) == 0)
2138 || (((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0xffffffff
2139 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) != 0))
2140 {
2141 int fast_int = (~low_bits & 0xffffffff);
2142
2143 if ((SPARC_SETHI_P (fast_int)
2144 && (~high_bits & 0xffffffff) == 0)
2145 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (fast_int))
2146 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, fast_int));
2147 else
2148 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, GEN_INT64 (fast_int));
2149 }
2150 else
2151 {
2152 rtx negated_const;
2153 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
2154 negated_const = GEN_INT (((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00) |
2155 (((HOST_WIDE_INT)((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff))<<32));
2156 #else
2157 negated_const = immed_double_const ((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00,
2158 (~high_bits) & 0xffffffff,
2159 DImode);
2160 #endif
2161 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, negated_const);
2162 }
2163
2164 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
2165 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations
2166 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */
2167 if (trailing_bits == 0x3ff)
2168 {
2169 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
2170 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
2171 }
2172 else
2173 {
2174 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2175 op0,
2176 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
2177 (-0x400 | trailing_bits))));
2178 }
2179 return;
2180 }
2181
2182 /* 1) sethi %hi(xxx), %reg
2183 * or %reg, %lo(xxx), %reg
2184 * sllx %reg, yyy, %reg
2185 *
2186 * ??? This is just a generalized version of the low_bits==0
2187 * thing above, FIXME...
2188 */
2189 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 32)
2190 {
2191 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
2192 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2193 lowest_bit_set, 0);
2194
2195 /* We can't get here in this state. */
2196 if (highest_bit_set < 32
2197 || lowest_bit_set >= 32)
2198 abort ();
2199
2200 /* So what we know is that the set bits straddle the
2201 middle of the 64-bit word. */
2202 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp,
2203 focus_bits, 0,
2204 lowest_bit_set);
2205 return;
2206 }
2207
2208 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg
2209 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
2210 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg
2211 * or %reg, low_bits, %reg
2212 */
2213 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P(low_bits)
2214 && ((int)low_bits > 0))
2215 {
2216 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits, 32);
2217 return;
2218 }
2219
2220 /* The easiest way when all else fails, is full decomposition. */
2221 #if 0
2222 printf ("sparc_emit_set_const64: Hard constant [%08lx%08lx] neg[%08lx%08lx]\n",
2223 high_bits, low_bits, ~high_bits, ~low_bits);
2224 #endif
2225 sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits);
2226 }
2227
2228 /* Given a comparison code (EQ, NE, etc.) and the first operand of a COMPARE,
2229 return the mode to be used for the comparison. For floating-point,
2230 CCFP[E]mode is used. CC_NOOVmode should be used when the first operand
2231 is a PLUS, MINUS, NEG, or ASHIFT. CCmode should be used when no special
2232 processing is needed. */
2233
2234 enum machine_mode
2235 select_cc_mode (op, x, y)
2236 enum rtx_code op;
2237 rtx x;
2238 rtx y ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
2239 {
2240 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2241 {
2242 switch (op)
2243 {
2244 case EQ:
2245 case NE:
2246 case UNORDERED:
2247 case ORDERED:
2248 case UNLT:
2249 case UNLE:
2250 case UNGT:
2251 case UNGE:
2252 case UNEQ:
2253 case LTGT:
2254 return CCFPmode;
2255
2256 case LT:
2257 case LE:
2258 case GT:
2259 case GE:
2260 return CCFPEmode;
2261
2262 default:
2263 abort ();
2264 }
2265 }
2266 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS || GET_CODE (x) == MINUS
2267 || GET_CODE (x) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT)
2268 {
2269 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
2270 return CCX_NOOVmode;
2271 else
2272 return CC_NOOVmode;
2273 }
2274 else
2275 {
2276 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
2277 return CCXmode;
2278 else
2279 return CCmode;
2280 }
2281 }
2282
2283 /* X and Y are two things to compare using CODE. Emit the compare insn and
2284 return the rtx for the cc reg in the proper mode. */
2285
2286 rtx
2287 gen_compare_reg (code, x, y)
2288 enum rtx_code code;
2289 rtx x, y;
2290 {
2291 enum machine_mode mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (code, x, y);
2292 rtx cc_reg;
2293
2294 /* ??? We don't have movcc patterns so we cannot generate pseudo regs for the
2295 fcc regs (cse can't tell they're really call clobbered regs and will
2296 remove a duplicate comparison even if there is an intervening function
2297 call - it will then try to reload the cc reg via an int reg which is why
2298 we need the movcc patterns). It is possible to provide the movcc
2299 patterns by using the ldxfsr/stxfsr v9 insns. I tried it: you need two
2300 registers (say %g1,%g5) and it takes about 6 insns. A better fix would be
2301 to tell cse that CCFPE mode registers (even pseudos) are call
2302 clobbered. */
2303
2304 /* ??? This is an experiment. Rather than making changes to cse which may
2305 or may not be easy/clean, we do our own cse. This is possible because
2306 we will generate hard registers. Cse knows they're call clobbered (it
2307 doesn't know the same thing about pseudos). If we guess wrong, no big
2308 deal, but if we win, great! */
2309
2310 if (TARGET_V9 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2311 #if 1 /* experiment */
2312 {
2313 int reg;
2314 /* We cycle through the registers to ensure they're all exercised. */
2315 static int next_fcc_reg = 0;
2316 /* Previous x,y for each fcc reg. */
2317 static rtx prev_args[4][2];
2318
2319 /* Scan prev_args for x,y. */
2320 for (reg = 0; reg < 4; reg++)
2321 if (prev_args[reg][0] == x && prev_args[reg][1] == y)
2322 break;
2323 if (reg == 4)
2324 {
2325 reg = next_fcc_reg;
2326 prev_args[reg][0] = x;
2327 prev_args[reg][1] = y;
2328 next_fcc_reg = (next_fcc_reg + 1) & 3;
2329 }
2330 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, reg + SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG);
2331 }
2332 #else
2333 cc_reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2334 #endif /* ! experiment */
2335 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2336 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_FCC_REG);
2337 else
2338 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_ICC_REG);
2339
2340 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, cc_reg,
2341 gen_rtx_COMPARE (mode, x, y)));
2342
2343 return cc_reg;
2344 }
2345
2346 /* This function is used for v9 only.
2347 CODE is the code for an Scc's comparison.
2348 OPERANDS[0] is the target of the Scc insn.
2349 OPERANDS[1] is the value we compare against const0_rtx (which hasn't
2350 been generated yet).
2351
2352 This function is needed to turn
2353
2354 (set (reg:SI 110)
2355 (gt (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
2356 (const_int 0)))
2357 into
2358 (set (reg:SI 110)
2359 (gt:DI (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
2360 (const_int 0)))
2361
2362 IE: The instruction recognizer needs to see the mode of the comparison to
2363 find the right instruction. We could use "gt:DI" right in the
2364 define_expand, but leaving it out allows us to handle DI, SI, etc.
2365
2366 We refer to the global sparc compare operands sparc_compare_op0 and
2367 sparc_compare_op1. */
2368
2369 int
2370 gen_v9_scc (compare_code, operands)
2371 enum rtx_code compare_code;
2372 register rtx *operands;
2373 {
2374 rtx temp, op0, op1;
2375
2376 if (! TARGET_ARCH64
2377 && (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0) == DImode
2378 || GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode))
2379 return 0;
2380
2381 op0 = sparc_compare_op0;
2382 op1 = sparc_compare_op1;
2383
2384 /* Try to use the movrCC insns. */
2385 if (TARGET_ARCH64
2386 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
2387 && op1 == const0_rtx
2388 && v9_regcmp_p (compare_code))
2389 {
2390 /* Special case for op0 != 0. This can be done with one instruction if
2391 operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0. */
2392
2393 if (compare_code == NE
2394 && GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode
2395 && rtx_equal_p (op0, operands[0]))
2396 {
2397 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2398 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (DImode,
2399 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
2400 op0, const0_rtx),
2401 const1_rtx,
2402 operands[0])));
2403 return 1;
2404 }
2405
2406 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (operands[0], op0))
2407 {
2408 /* Handle the case where operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0.
2409 We "early clobber" the result. */
2410 op0 = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0));
2411 emit_move_insn (op0, sparc_compare_op0);
2412 }
2413
2414 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
2415 if (GET_MODE (op0) != DImode)
2416 {
2417 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
2418 convert_move (temp, op0, 0);
2419 }
2420 else
2421 temp = op0;
2422 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2423 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2424 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
2425 temp, const0_rtx),
2426 const1_rtx,
2427 operands[0])));
2428 return 1;
2429 }
2430 else
2431 {
2432 operands[1] = gen_compare_reg (compare_code, op0, op1);
2433
2434 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2435 {
2436 case CCmode :
2437 case CCXmode :
2438 case CCFPEmode :
2439 case CCFPmode :
2440 break;
2441 default :
2442 abort ();
2443 }
2444 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
2445 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2446 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2447 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code,
2448 GET_MODE (operands[1]),
2449 operands[1], const0_rtx),
2450 const1_rtx, operands[0])));
2451 return 1;
2452 }
2453 }
2454
2455 /* Emit a conditional jump insn for the v9 architecture using comparison code
2456 CODE and jump target LABEL.
2457 This function exists to take advantage of the v9 brxx insns. */
2458
2459 void
2460 emit_v9_brxx_insn (code, op0, label)
2461 enum rtx_code code;
2462 rtx op0, label;
2463 {
2464 emit_jump_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2465 pc_rtx,
2466 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (VOIDmode,
2467 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (op0),
2468 op0, const0_rtx),
2469 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (VOIDmode, label),
2470 pc_rtx)));
2471 }
2472
2473 /* Generate a DFmode part of a hard TFmode register.
2474 REG is the TFmode hard register, LOW is 1 for the
2475 low 64bit of the register and 0 otherwise.
2476 */
2477 rtx
2478 gen_df_reg (reg, low)
2479 rtx reg;
2480 int low;
2481 {
2482 int regno = REGNO (reg);
2483
2484 if ((WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0) ^ (low != 0))
2485 regno += (TARGET_ARCH64 && regno < 32) ? 1 : 2;
2486 return gen_rtx_REG (DFmode, regno);
2487 }
2488 \f
2489 /* Generate a call to FUNC with OPERANDS. Operand 0 is the return value.
2490 Unlike normal calls, TFmode operands are passed by reference. It is
2491 assumed that no more than 3 operands are required. */
2492
2493 static void
2494 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func_name, nargs, operands)
2495 const char *func_name;
2496 int nargs;
2497 rtx *operands;
2498 {
2499 rtx ret_slot = NULL, arg[3], func_sym;
2500 int i;
2501
2502 /* We only expect to be called for conversions, unary, and binary ops. */
2503 if (nargs < 2 || nargs > 3)
2504 abort ();
2505
2506 for (i = 0; i < nargs; ++i)
2507 {
2508 rtx this_arg = operands[i];
2509 rtx this_slot;
2510
2511 /* TFmode arguments and return values are passed by reference. */
2512 if (GET_MODE (this_arg) == TFmode)
2513 {
2514 int force_stack_temp;
2515
2516 force_stack_temp = 0;
2517 if (TARGET_BUGGY_QP_LIB && i == 0)
2518 force_stack_temp = 1;
2519
2520 if (GET_CODE (this_arg) == MEM
2521 && ! force_stack_temp)
2522 this_arg = XEXP (this_arg, 0);
2523 else if (CONSTANT_P (this_arg)
2524 && ! force_stack_temp)
2525 {
2526 this_slot = force_const_mem (TFmode, this_arg);
2527 this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0);
2528 }
2529 else
2530 {
2531 this_slot = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE (TFmode), 0);
2532
2533 /* Operand 0 is the return value. We'll copy it out later. */
2534 if (i > 0)
2535 emit_move_insn (this_slot, this_arg);
2536 else
2537 ret_slot = this_slot;
2538
2539 this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0);
2540 }
2541 }
2542
2543 arg[i] = this_arg;
2544 }
2545
2546 func_sym = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, func_name);
2547
2548 if (GET_MODE (operands[0]) == TFmode)
2549 {
2550 if (nargs == 2)
2551 emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 2,
2552 arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]),
2553 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]));
2554 else
2555 emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 3,
2556 arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]),
2557 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]),
2558 arg[2], GET_MODE (arg[2]));
2559
2560 if (ret_slot)
2561 emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret_slot);
2562 }
2563 else
2564 {
2565 rtx ret;
2566
2567 if (nargs != 2)
2568 abort ();
2569
2570 ret = emit_library_call_value (func_sym, operands[0], LCT_NORMAL,
2571 GET_MODE (operands[0]), 1,
2572 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]));
2573
2574 if (ret != operands[0])
2575 emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret);
2576 }
2577 }
2578
2579 /* Expand soft-float TFmode calls to sparc abi routines. */
2580
2581 static void
2582 emit_soft_tfmode_binop (code, operands)
2583 enum rtx_code code;
2584 rtx *operands;
2585 {
2586 const char *func;
2587
2588 switch (code)
2589 {
2590 case PLUS:
2591 func = "_Qp_add";
2592 break;
2593 case MINUS:
2594 func = "_Qp_sub";
2595 break;
2596 case MULT:
2597 func = "_Qp_mul";
2598 break;
2599 case DIV:
2600 func = "_Qp_div";
2601 break;
2602 default:
2603 abort ();
2604 }
2605
2606 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 3, operands);
2607 }
2608
2609 static void
2610 emit_soft_tfmode_unop (code, operands)
2611 enum rtx_code code;
2612 rtx *operands;
2613 {
2614 const char *func;
2615
2616 switch (code)
2617 {
2618 case SQRT:
2619 func = "_Qp_sqrt";
2620 break;
2621 default:
2622 abort ();
2623 }
2624
2625 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands);
2626 }
2627
2628 static void
2629 emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (code, operands)
2630 enum rtx_code code;
2631 rtx *operands;
2632 {
2633 const char *func;
2634
2635 switch (code)
2636 {
2637 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
2638 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2639 {
2640 case SFmode:
2641 func = "_Qp_stoq";
2642 break;
2643 case DFmode:
2644 func = "_Qp_dtoq";
2645 break;
2646 default:
2647 abort ();
2648 }
2649 break;
2650
2651 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
2652 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
2653 {
2654 case SFmode:
2655 func = "_Qp_qtos";
2656 break;
2657 case DFmode:
2658 func = "_Qp_qtod";
2659 break;
2660 default:
2661 abort ();
2662 }
2663 break;
2664
2665 case FLOAT:
2666 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2667 {
2668 case SImode:
2669 func = "_Qp_itoq";
2670 break;
2671 case DImode:
2672 func = "_Qp_xtoq";
2673 break;
2674 default:
2675 abort ();
2676 }
2677 break;
2678
2679 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
2680 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2681 {
2682 case SImode:
2683 func = "_Qp_uitoq";
2684 break;
2685 case DImode:
2686 func = "_Qp_uxtoq";
2687 break;
2688 default:
2689 abort ();
2690 }
2691 break;
2692
2693 case FIX:
2694 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
2695 {
2696 case SImode:
2697 func = "_Qp_qtoi";
2698 break;
2699 case DImode:
2700 func = "_Qp_qtox";
2701 break;
2702 default:
2703 abort ();
2704 }
2705 break;
2706
2707 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
2708 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
2709 {
2710 case SImode:
2711 func = "_Qp_qtoui";
2712 break;
2713 case DImode:
2714 func = "_Qp_qtoux";
2715 break;
2716 default:
2717 abort ();
2718 }
2719 break;
2720
2721 default:
2722 abort ();
2723 }
2724
2725 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands);
2726 }
2727
2728 /* Expand a hard-float tfmode operation. All arguments must be in
2729 registers. */
2730
2731 static void
2732 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands)
2733 enum rtx_code code;
2734 rtx *operands;
2735 {
2736 rtx op, dest;
2737
2738 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '1')
2739 {
2740 operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]);
2741 op = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]), operands[1]);
2742 }
2743 else
2744 {
2745 operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]);
2746 operands[2] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[2]), operands[2]);
2747 op = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2748 operands[1], operands[2]);
2749 }
2750
2751 if (register_operand (operands[0], VOIDmode))
2752 dest = operands[0];
2753 else
2754 dest = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (operands[0]));
2755
2756 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, op));
2757
2758 if (dest != operands[0])
2759 emit_move_insn (operands[0], dest);
2760 }
2761
2762 void
2763 emit_tfmode_binop (code, operands)
2764 enum rtx_code code;
2765 rtx *operands;
2766 {
2767 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
2768 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
2769 else
2770 emit_soft_tfmode_binop (code, operands);
2771 }
2772
2773 void
2774 emit_tfmode_unop (code, operands)
2775 enum rtx_code code;
2776 rtx *operands;
2777 {
2778 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
2779 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
2780 else
2781 emit_soft_tfmode_unop (code, operands);
2782 }
2783
2784 void
2785 emit_tfmode_cvt (code, operands)
2786 enum rtx_code code;
2787 rtx *operands;
2788 {
2789 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
2790 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
2791 else
2792 emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (code, operands);
2793 }
2794 \f
2795 /* Return nonzero if a return peephole merging return with
2796 setting of output register is ok. */
2797 int
2798 leaf_return_peephole_ok ()
2799 {
2800 return (actual_fsize == 0);
2801 }
2802
2803 /* Return nonzero if a branch/jump/call instruction will be emitting
2804 nop into its delay slot. */
2805
2806 int
2807 empty_delay_slot (insn)
2808 rtx insn;
2809 {
2810 rtx seq;
2811
2812 /* If no previous instruction (should not happen), return true. */
2813 if (PREV_INSN (insn) == NULL)
2814 return 1;
2815
2816 seq = NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn));
2817 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SEQUENCE)
2818 return 0;
2819
2820 return 1;
2821 }
2822
2823 /* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the function epilogue's
2824 delay slot. SLOT is the slot we are trying to fill. */
2825
2826 int
2827 eligible_for_epilogue_delay (trial, slot)
2828 rtx trial;
2829 int slot;
2830 {
2831 rtx pat, src;
2832
2833 if (slot >= 1)
2834 return 0;
2835
2836 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
2837 return 0;
2838
2839 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
2840 return 0;
2841
2842 /* If there are any call-saved registers, we should scan TRIAL if it
2843 does not reference them. For now just make it easy. */
2844 if (num_gfregs)
2845 return 0;
2846
2847 /* If the function uses __builtin_eh_return, the eh_return machinery
2848 occupies the delay slot. */
2849 if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
2850 return 0;
2851
2852 /* In the case of a true leaf function, anything can go into the delay slot.
2853 A delay slot only exists however if the frame size is zero, otherwise
2854 we will put an insn to adjust the stack after the return. */
2855 if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
2856 {
2857 if (leaf_return_peephole_ok ())
2858 return ((get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial)
2859 == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE));
2860 return 0;
2861 }
2862
2863 pat = PATTERN (trial);
2864
2865 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
2866 a `restore' or `return' insn can go into the delay slot. */
2867 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
2868 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24)
2869 return 0;
2870
2871 /* If this instruction sets up floating point register and we have a return
2872 instruction, it can probably go in. But restore will not work
2873 with FP_REGS. */
2874 if (REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
2875 {
2876 if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
2877 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
2878 return 1;
2879 return 0;
2880 }
2881
2882 /* The set of insns matched here must agree precisely with the set of
2883 patterns paired with a RETURN in sparc.md. */
2884
2885 src = SET_SRC (pat);
2886
2887 /* This matches "*return_[qhs]i" or even "*return_di" on TARGET_ARCH64. */
2888 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2889 && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2890 {
2891 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
2892 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2893 else
2894 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
2895 }
2896
2897 /* This matches "*return_di". */
2898 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2899 && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2900 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2901
2902 /* This matches "*return_sf_no_fpu". */
2903 else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
2904 && register_operand (src, SFmode))
2905 return 1;
2906
2907 /* If we have return instruction, anything that does not use
2908 local or output registers and can go into a delay slot wins. */
2909 else if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
2910 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
2911 return 1;
2912
2913 /* This matches "*return_addsi". */
2914 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2915 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2916 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
2917 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2918 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
2919 return 1;
2920
2921 /* This matches "*return_adddi". */
2922 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2923 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2924 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
2925 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2926 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
2927 return 1;
2928
2929 /* This can match "*return_losum_[sd]i".
2930 Catch only some cases, so that return_losum* don't have
2931 to be too big. */
2932 else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
2933 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
2934 && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2935 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
2936 || (TARGET_ARCH64
2937 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2938 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
2939 return 1;
2940
2941 /* sll{,x} reg,1,reg2 is add reg,reg,reg2 as well. */
2942 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
2943 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2944 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
2945 && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
2946 return 1;
2947
2948 return 0;
2949 }
2950
2951 /* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the sibling call
2952 delay slot. */
2953
2954 int
2955 eligible_for_sibcall_delay (trial)
2956 rtx trial;
2957 {
2958 rtx pat, src;
2959
2960 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
2961 return 0;
2962
2963 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
2964 return 0;
2965
2966 pat = PATTERN (trial);
2967
2968 if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
2969 {
2970 /* If the tail call is done using the call instruction,
2971 we have to restore %o7 in the delay slot. */
2972 if ((TARGET_ARCH64 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) || flag_pic)
2973 return 0;
2974
2975 /* %g1 is used to build the function address */
2976 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1), pat))
2977 return 0;
2978
2979 return 1;
2980 }
2981
2982 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
2983 a `restore' insn can go into the delay slot. */
2984 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
2985 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24
2986 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
2987 return 0;
2988
2989 /* If it mentions %o7, it can't go in, because sibcall will clobber it
2990 in most cases. */
2991 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 15), pat))
2992 return 0;
2993
2994 src = SET_SRC (pat);
2995
2996 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2997 && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2998 {
2999 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
3000 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
3001 else
3002 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
3003 }
3004
3005 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
3006 && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
3007 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
3008
3009 else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
3010 && register_operand (src, SFmode))
3011 return 1;
3012
3013 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
3014 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
3015 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
3016 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
3017 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
3018 return 1;
3019
3020 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
3021 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
3022 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
3023 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
3024 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
3025 return 1;
3026
3027 else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
3028 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
3029 && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
3030 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
3031 || (TARGET_ARCH64
3032 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
3033 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
3034 return 1;
3035
3036 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
3037 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
3038 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
3039 && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
3040 return 1;
3041
3042 return 0;
3043 }
3044
3045 static int
3046 check_return_regs (x)
3047 rtx x;
3048 {
3049 switch (GET_CODE (x))
3050 {
3051 case REG:
3052 return IN_OR_GLOBAL_P (x);
3053
3054 case CONST_INT:
3055 case CONST_DOUBLE:
3056 case CONST:
3057 case SYMBOL_REF:
3058 case LABEL_REF:
3059 return 1;
3060
3061 case SET:
3062 case IOR:
3063 case AND:
3064 case XOR:
3065 case PLUS:
3066 case MINUS:
3067 if (check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 1)) == 0)
3068 return 0;
3069 case NOT:
3070 case NEG:
3071 case MEM:
3072 return check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 0));
3073
3074 default:
3075 return 0;
3076 }
3077
3078 }
3079
3080 int
3081 short_branch (uid1, uid2)
3082 int uid1, uid2;
3083 {
3084 int delta = INSN_ADDRESSES (uid1) - INSN_ADDRESSES (uid2);
3085
3086 /* Leave a few words of "slop". */
3087 if (delta >= -1023 && delta <= 1022)
3088 return 1;
3089
3090 return 0;
3091 }
3092
3093 /* Return nonzero if REG is not used after INSN.
3094 We assume REG is a reload reg, and therefore does
3095 not live past labels or calls or jumps. */
3096 int
3097 reg_unused_after (reg, insn)
3098 rtx reg;
3099 rtx insn;
3100 {
3101 enum rtx_code code, prev_code = UNKNOWN;
3102
3103 while ((insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)))
3104 {
3105 if (prev_code == CALL_INSN && call_used_regs[REGNO (reg)])
3106 return 1;
3107
3108 code = GET_CODE (insn);
3109 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CODE_LABEL)
3110 return 1;
3111
3112 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
3113 {
3114 rtx set = single_set (insn);
3115 int in_src = set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_SRC (set));
3116 if (set && in_src)
3117 return 0;
3118 if (set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_DEST (set)))
3119 return 1;
3120 if (set == 0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
3121 return 0;
3122 }
3123 prev_code = code;
3124 }
3125 return 1;
3126 }
3127 \f
3128 /* The table we use to reference PIC data. */
3129 static GTY(()) rtx global_offset_table;
3130
3131 /* The function we use to get at it. */
3132 static GTY(()) rtx get_pc_symbol;
3133 static char get_pc_symbol_name[256];
3134
3135 /* Ensure that we are not using patterns that are not OK with PIC. */
3136
3137 int
3138 check_pic (i)
3139 int i;
3140 {
3141 switch (flag_pic)
3142 {
3143 case 1:
3144 if (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == SYMBOL_REF
3145 || (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == CONST
3146 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0)) == MINUS
3147 && (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 0)
3148 == global_offset_table)
3149 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 1))
3150 == CONST))))
3151 abort ();
3152 case 2:
3153 default:
3154 return 1;
3155 }
3156 }
3157
3158 /* Return true if X is an address which needs a temporary register when
3159 reloaded while generating PIC code. */
3160
3161 int
3162 pic_address_needs_scratch (x)
3163 rtx x;
3164 {
3165 /* An address which is a symbolic plus a non SMALL_INT needs a temp reg. */
3166 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
3167 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
3168 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
3169 && ! SMALL_INT (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))
3170 return 1;
3171
3172 return 0;
3173 }
3174
3175 /* Legitimize PIC addresses. If the address is already position-independent,
3176 we return ORIG. Newly generated position-independent addresses go into a
3177 reg. This is REG if nonzero, otherwise we allocate register(s) as
3178 necessary. */
3179
3180 rtx
3181 legitimize_pic_address (orig, mode, reg)
3182 rtx orig;
3183 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
3184 rtx reg;
3185 {
3186 if (GET_CODE (orig) == SYMBOL_REF)
3187 {
3188 rtx pic_ref, address;
3189 rtx insn;
3190
3191 if (reg == 0)
3192 {
3193 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3194 abort ();
3195 else
3196 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3197 }
3198
3199 if (flag_pic == 2)
3200 {
3201 /* If not during reload, allocate another temp reg here for loading
3202 in the address, so that these instructions can be optimized
3203 properly. */
3204 rtx temp_reg = ((reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3205 ? reg : gen_reg_rtx (Pmode));
3206
3207 /* Must put the SYMBOL_REF inside an UNSPEC here so that cse
3208 won't get confused into thinking that these two instructions
3209 are loading in the true address of the symbol. If in the
3210 future a PIC rtx exists, that should be used instead. */
3211 if (Pmode == SImode)
3212 {
3213 emit_insn (gen_movsi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
3214 emit_insn (gen_movsi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
3215 }
3216 else
3217 {
3218 emit_insn (gen_movdi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
3219 emit_insn (gen_movdi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
3220 }
3221 address = temp_reg;
3222 }
3223 else
3224 address = orig;
3225
3226 pic_ref = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode,
3227 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
3228 pic_offset_table_rtx, address));
3229 current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
3230 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (pic_ref) = 1;
3231 insn = emit_move_insn (reg, pic_ref);
3232 /* Put a REG_EQUAL note on this insn, so that it can be optimized
3233 by loop. */
3234 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_EQUAL, orig,
3235 REG_NOTES (insn));
3236 return reg;
3237 }
3238 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == CONST)
3239 {
3240 rtx base, offset;
3241
3242 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS
3243 && XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx)
3244 return orig;
3245
3246 if (reg == 0)
3247 {
3248 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3249 abort ();
3250 else
3251 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3252 }
3253
3254 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS)
3255 {
3256 base = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0), Pmode, reg);
3257 offset = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 1), Pmode,
3258 base == reg ? 0 : reg);
3259 }
3260 else
3261 abort ();
3262
3263 if (GET_CODE (offset) == CONST_INT)
3264 {
3265 if (SMALL_INT (offset))
3266 return plus_constant (base, INTVAL (offset));
3267 else if (! reload_in_progress && ! reload_completed)
3268 offset = force_reg (Pmode, offset);
3269 else
3270 /* If we reach here, then something is seriously wrong. */
3271 abort ();
3272 }
3273 return gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, base, offset);
3274 }
3275 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == LABEL_REF)
3276 /* ??? Why do we do this? */
3277 /* Now movsi_pic_label_ref uses it, but we ought to be checking that
3278 the register is live instead, in case it is eliminated. */
3279 current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
3280
3281 return orig;
3282 }
3283
3284 /* Emit special PIC prologues. */
3285
3286 void
3287 load_pic_register ()
3288 {
3289 /* Labels to get the PC in the prologue of this function. */
3290 int orig_flag_pic = flag_pic;
3291
3292 if (! flag_pic)
3293 abort ();
3294
3295 /* If we haven't emitted the special get_pc helper function, do so now. */
3296 if (get_pc_symbol_name[0] == 0)
3297 {
3298 int align;
3299
3300 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (get_pc_symbol_name, "LGETPC", 0);
3301 text_section ();
3302
3303 align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3304 if (align > 0)
3305 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
3306 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "LGETPC", 0);
3307 fputs ("\tretl\n\tadd\t%o7, %l7, %l7\n", asm_out_file);
3308 }
3309
3310 /* Initialize every time through, since we can't easily
3311 know this to be permanent. */
3312 global_offset_table = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
3313 get_pc_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, get_pc_symbol_name);
3314 flag_pic = 0;
3315
3316 emit_insn (gen_get_pc (pic_offset_table_rtx, global_offset_table,
3317 get_pc_symbol));
3318
3319 flag_pic = orig_flag_pic;
3320
3321 /* Need to emit this whether or not we obey regdecls,
3322 since setjmp/longjmp can cause life info to screw up.
3323 ??? In the case where we don't obey regdecls, this is not sufficient
3324 since we may not fall out the bottom. */
3325 emit_insn (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, pic_offset_table_rtx));
3326 }
3327 \f
3328 /* Return 1 if RTX is a MEM which is known to be aligned to at
3329 least a DESIRED byte boundary. */
3330
3331 int
3332 mem_min_alignment (mem, desired)
3333 rtx mem;
3334 int desired;
3335 {
3336 rtx addr, base, offset;
3337
3338 /* If it's not a MEM we can't accept it. */
3339 if (GET_CODE (mem) != MEM)
3340 return 0;
3341
3342 addr = XEXP (mem, 0);
3343 base = offset = NULL_RTX;
3344 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
3345 {
3346 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG)
3347 {
3348 base = XEXP (addr, 0);
3349
3350 /* What we are saying here is that if the base
3351 REG is aligned properly, the compiler will make
3352 sure any REG based index upon it will be so
3353 as well. */
3354 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3355 offset = XEXP (addr, 1);
3356 else
3357 offset = const0_rtx;
3358 }
3359 }
3360 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG)
3361 {
3362 base = addr;
3363 offset = const0_rtx;
3364 }
3365
3366 if (base != NULL_RTX)
3367 {
3368 int regno = REGNO (base);
3369
3370 if (regno != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
3371 {
3372 /* Check if the compiler has recorded some information
3373 about the alignment of the base REG. If reload has
3374 completed, we already matched with proper alignments.
3375 If not running global_alloc, reload might give us
3376 unaligned pointer to local stack though. */
3377 if (((cfun != 0
3378 && REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (regno) >= desired * BITS_PER_UNIT)
3379 || (optimize && reload_completed))
3380 && (INTVAL (offset) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
3381 return 1;
3382 }
3383 else
3384 {
3385 if (((INTVAL (offset) - SPARC_STACK_BIAS) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
3386 return 1;
3387 }
3388 }
3389 else if (! TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
3390 || CONSTANT_P (addr)
3391 || GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
3392 {
3393 /* Anything else we know is properly aligned unless TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
3394 is true, in which case we can only assume that an access is aligned if
3395 it is to a constant address, or the address involves a LO_SUM. */
3396 return 1;
3397 }
3398
3399 /* An obviously unaligned address. */
3400 return 0;
3401 }
3402
3403 \f
3404 /* Vectors to keep interesting information about registers where it can easily
3405 be got. We used to use the actual mode value as the bit number, but there
3406 are more than 32 modes now. Instead we use two tables: one indexed by
3407 hard register number, and one indexed by mode. */
3408
3409 /* The purpose of sparc_mode_class is to shrink the range of modes so that
3410 they all fit (as bit numbers) in a 32 bit word (again). Each real mode is
3411 mapped into one sparc_mode_class mode. */
3412
3413 enum sparc_mode_class {
3414 S_MODE, D_MODE, T_MODE, O_MODE,
3415 SF_MODE, DF_MODE, TF_MODE, OF_MODE,
3416 CC_MODE, CCFP_MODE
3417 };
3418
3419 /* Modes for single-word and smaller quantities. */
3420 #define S_MODES ((1 << (int) S_MODE) | (1 << (int) SF_MODE))
3421
3422 /* Modes for double-word and smaller quantities. */
3423 #define D_MODES (S_MODES | (1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << DF_MODE))
3424
3425 /* Modes for quad-word and smaller quantities. */
3426 #define T_MODES (D_MODES | (1 << (int) T_MODE) | (1 << (int) TF_MODE))
3427
3428 /* Modes for 8-word and smaller quantities. */
3429 #define O_MODES (T_MODES | (1 << (int) O_MODE) | (1 << (int) OF_MODE))
3430
3431 /* Modes for single-float quantities. We must allow any single word or
3432 smaller quantity. This is because the fix/float conversion instructions
3433 take integer inputs/outputs from the float registers. */
3434 #define SF_MODES (S_MODES)
3435
3436 /* Modes for double-float and smaller quantities. */
3437 #define DF_MODES (S_MODES | D_MODES)
3438
3439 /* Modes for double-float only quantities. */
3440 #define DF_MODES_NO_S ((1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << (int) DF_MODE))
3441
3442 /* Modes for quad-float only quantities. */
3443 #define TF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) TF_MODE)
3444
3445 /* Modes for quad-float and smaller quantities. */
3446 #define TF_MODES (DF_MODES | TF_ONLY_MODES)
3447
3448 /* Modes for quad-float and double-float quantities. */
3449 #define TF_MODES_NO_S (DF_MODES_NO_S | TF_ONLY_MODES)
3450
3451 /* Modes for quad-float pair only quantities. */
3452 #define OF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) OF_MODE)
3453
3454 /* Modes for quad-float pairs and smaller quantities. */
3455 #define OF_MODES (TF_MODES | OF_ONLY_MODES)
3456
3457 #define OF_MODES_NO_S (TF_MODES_NO_S | OF_ONLY_MODES)
3458
3459 /* Modes for condition codes. */
3460 #define CC_MODES (1 << (int) CC_MODE)
3461 #define CCFP_MODES (1 << (int) CCFP_MODE)
3462
3463 /* Value is 1 if register/mode pair is acceptable on sparc.
3464 The funny mixture of D and T modes is because integer operations
3465 do not specially operate on tetra quantities, so non-quad-aligned
3466 registers can hold quadword quantities (except %o4 and %i4 because
3467 they cross fixed registers). */
3468
3469 /* This points to either the 32 bit or the 64 bit version. */
3470 const int *hard_regno_mode_classes;
3471
3472 static const int hard_32bit_mode_classes[] = {
3473 S_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3474 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3475 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3476 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3477
3478 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3479 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3480 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3481 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3482
3483 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
3484 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */
3485 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3486 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3487 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3488 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3489
3490 /* %fcc[0123] */
3491 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,
3492
3493 /* %icc */
3494 CC_MODES
3495 };
3496
3497 static const int hard_64bit_mode_classes[] = {
3498 D_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3499 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3500 T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3501 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3502
3503 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3504 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3505 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3506 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3507
3508 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
3509 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */
3510 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3511 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3512 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3513 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3514
3515 /* %fcc[0123] */
3516 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,
3517
3518 /* %icc */
3519 CC_MODES
3520 };
3521
3522 int sparc_mode_class [NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
3523
3524 enum reg_class sparc_regno_reg_class[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER];
3525
3526 static void
3527 sparc_init_modes ()
3528 {
3529 int i;
3530
3531 for (i = 0; i < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; i++)
3532 {
3533 switch (GET_MODE_CLASS (i))
3534 {
3535 case MODE_INT:
3536 case MODE_PARTIAL_INT:
3537 case MODE_COMPLEX_INT:
3538 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
3539 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) S_MODE;
3540 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
3541 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) D_MODE;
3542 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
3543 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) T_MODE;
3544 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
3545 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) O_MODE;
3546 else
3547 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3548 break;
3549 case MODE_FLOAT:
3550 case MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT:
3551 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
3552 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) SF_MODE;
3553 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
3554 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) DF_MODE;
3555 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
3556 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) TF_MODE;
3557 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
3558 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) OF_MODE;
3559 else
3560 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3561 break;
3562 case MODE_CC:
3563 default:
3564 /* mode_class hasn't been initialized yet for EXTRA_CC_MODES, so
3565 we must explicitly check for them here. */
3566 if (i == (int) CCFPmode || i == (int) CCFPEmode)
3567 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CCFP_MODE;
3568 else if (i == (int) CCmode || i == (int) CC_NOOVmode
3569 || i == (int) CCXmode || i == (int) CCX_NOOVmode)
3570 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CC_MODE;
3571 else
3572 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3573 break;
3574 }
3575 }
3576
3577 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
3578 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_64bit_mode_classes;
3579 else
3580 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_32bit_mode_classes;
3581
3582 /* Initialize the array used by REGNO_REG_CLASS. */
3583 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
3584 {
3585 if (i < 16 && TARGET_V8PLUS)
3586 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = I64_REGS;
3587 else if (i < 32 || i == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
3588 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = GENERAL_REGS;
3589 else if (i < 64)
3590 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FP_REGS;
3591 else if (i < 96)
3592 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = EXTRA_FP_REGS;
3593 else if (i < 100)
3594 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FPCC_REGS;
3595 else
3596 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = NO_REGS;
3597 }
3598 }
3599 \f
3600 /* Save non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.
3601 N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies even to
3602 v9 int regs as it simplifies the code. */
3603
3604 static int
3605 save_regs (file, low, high, base, offset, n_regs, real_offset)
3606 FILE *file;
3607 int low, high;
3608 const char *base;
3609 int offset;
3610 int n_regs;
3611 int real_offset;
3612 {
3613 int i;
3614
3615 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
3616 {
3617 for (i = low; i < high; i++)
3618 {
3619 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3620 {
3621 fprintf (file, "\tstx\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3622 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
3623 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3624 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
3625 n_regs += 2;
3626 }
3627 }
3628 }
3629 else
3630 {
3631 for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
3632 {
3633 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3634 {
3635 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3636 {
3637 fprintf (file, "\tstd\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3638 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
3639 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3640 {
3641 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
3642 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
3643 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i+1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
3644 }
3645 n_regs += 2;
3646 }
3647 else
3648 {
3649 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3650 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
3651 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3652 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
3653 n_regs += 2;
3654 }
3655 }
3656 else
3657 {
3658 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3659 {
3660 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
3661 reg_names[i+1], base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
3662 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
3663 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i + 1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
3664 n_regs += 2;
3665 }
3666 }
3667 }
3668 }
3669 return n_regs;
3670 }
3671
3672 /* Restore non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.
3673
3674 N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies even to
3675 v9 int regs as it simplifies the code. */
3676
3677 static int
3678 restore_regs (file, low, high, base, offset, n_regs)
3679 FILE *file;
3680 int low, high;
3681 const char *base;
3682 int offset;
3683 int n_regs;
3684 {
3685 int i;
3686
3687 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
3688 {
3689 for (i = low; i < high; i++)
3690 {
3691 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3692 fprintf (file, "\tldx\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3693 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
3694 n_regs += 2;
3695 }
3696 }
3697 else
3698 {
3699 for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
3700 {
3701 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3702 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3703 fprintf (file, "\tldd\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3704 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
3705 n_regs += 2;
3706 else
3707 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3708 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
3709 n_regs += 2;
3710 else if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
3711 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
3712 base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4, reg_names[i+1]),
3713 n_regs += 2;
3714 }
3715 }
3716 return n_regs;
3717 }
3718
3719 /* Compute the frame size required by the function. This function is called
3720 during the reload pass and also by output_function_prologue(). */
3721
3722 int
3723 compute_frame_size (size, leaf_function)
3724 int size;
3725 int leaf_function;
3726 {
3727 int n_regs = 0, i;
3728 int outgoing_args_size = (current_function_outgoing_args_size
3729 + REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (current_function_decl));
3730
3731 /* N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies
3732 even to v9 int regs to be consistent with save_regs/restore_regs. */
3733
3734 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
3735 {
3736 for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
3737 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3738 n_regs += 2;
3739 }
3740 else
3741 {
3742 for (i = 0; i < 8; i += 2)
3743 if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3744 || (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
3745 n_regs += 2;
3746 }
3747
3748 for (i = 32; i < (TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64); i += 2)
3749 if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
3750 || (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
3751 n_regs += 2;
3752
3753 /* Set up values for use in `function_epilogue'. */
3754 num_gfregs = n_regs;
3755
3756 if (leaf_function && n_regs == 0
3757 && size == 0 && current_function_outgoing_args_size == 0)
3758 {
3759 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize = 0;
3760 }
3761 else
3762 {
3763 /* We subtract STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET, remember it's negative. */
3764 apparent_fsize = (size - STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + 7) & -8;
3765 apparent_fsize += n_regs * 4;
3766 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize + ((outgoing_args_size + 7) & -8);
3767 }
3768
3769 /* Make sure nothing can clobber our register windows.
3770 If a SAVE must be done, or there is a stack-local variable,
3771 the register window area must be allocated.
3772 ??? For v8 we apparently need an additional 8 bytes of reserved space. */
3773 if (leaf_function == 0 || size > 0)
3774 actual_fsize += (16 * UNITS_PER_WORD) + (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 8);
3775
3776 return SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (actual_fsize);
3777 }
3778
3779 /* Build a (32 bit) big number in a register. */
3780 /* ??? We may be able to use the set macro here too. */
3781
3782 static void
3783 build_big_number (file, num, reg)
3784 FILE *file;
3785 int num;
3786 const char *reg;
3787 {
3788 if (num >= 0 || ! TARGET_ARCH64)
3789 {
3790 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %s\n", num, reg);
3791 if ((num & 0x3ff) != 0)
3792 fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, %%lo(%d), %s\n", reg, num, reg);
3793 }
3794 else /* num < 0 && TARGET_ARCH64 */
3795 {
3796 /* Sethi does not sign extend, so we must use a little trickery
3797 to use it for negative numbers. Invert the constant before
3798 loading it in, then use xor immediate to invert the loaded bits
3799 (along with the upper 32 bits) to the desired constant. This
3800 works because the sethi and immediate fields overlap. */
3801 int asize = num;
3802 int inv = ~asize;
3803 int low = -0x400 + (asize & 0x3FF);
3804
3805 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %s\n\txor\t%s, %d, %s\n",
3806 inv, reg, reg, low, reg);
3807 }
3808 }
3809
3810 /* Output any necessary .register pseudo-ops. */
3811 void
3812 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file)
3813 FILE *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
3814 {
3815 #ifdef HAVE_AS_REGISTER_PSEUDO_OP
3816 int i;
3817
3818 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3819 return;
3820
3821 /* Check if %g[2367] were used without
3822 .register being printed for them already. */
3823 for (i = 2; i < 8; i++)
3824 {
3825 if (regs_ever_live [i]
3826 && ! sparc_hard_reg_printed [i])
3827 {
3828 sparc_hard_reg_printed [i] = 1;
3829 fprintf (file, "\t.register\t%%g%d, #scratch\n", i);
3830 }
3831 if (i == 3) i = 5;
3832 }
3833 #endif
3834 }
3835
3836 /* This function generates the assembly code for function entry.
3837 FILE is a stdio stream to output the code to.
3838 SIZE is an int: how many units of temporary storage to allocate.
3839 Refer to the array `regs_ever_live' to determine which registers
3840 to save; `regs_ever_live[I]' is nonzero if register number I
3841 is ever used in the function. This macro is responsible for
3842 knowing which registers should not be saved even if used. */
3843
3844 /* On SPARC, move-double insns between fpu and cpu need an 8-byte block
3845 of memory. If any fpu reg is used in the function, we allocate
3846 such a block here, at the bottom of the frame, just in case it's needed.
3847
3848 If this function is a leaf procedure, then we may choose not
3849 to do a "save" insn. The decision about whether or not
3850 to do this is made in regclass.c. */
3851
3852 static void
3853 sparc_output_function_prologue (file, size)
3854 FILE *file;
3855 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
3856 {
3857 if (TARGET_FLAT)
3858 sparc_flat_function_prologue (file, size);
3859 else
3860 sparc_nonflat_function_prologue (file, size,
3861 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
3862 }
3863
3864 /* Output code for the function prologue. */
3865
3866 static void
3867 sparc_nonflat_function_prologue (file, size, leaf_function)
3868 FILE *file;
3869 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
3870 int leaf_function;
3871 {
3872 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file);
3873
3874 /* Need to use actual_fsize, since we are also allocating
3875 space for our callee (and our own register save area). */
3876 actual_fsize = compute_frame_size (size, leaf_function);
3877
3878 if (leaf_function)
3879 {
3880 frame_base_name = "%sp";
3881 frame_base_offset = actual_fsize + SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
3882 }
3883 else
3884 {
3885 frame_base_name = "%fp";
3886 frame_base_offset = SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
3887 }
3888
3889 /* This is only for the human reader. */
3890 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 0\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
3891
3892 if (actual_fsize == 0)
3893 /* do nothing. */ ;
3894 else if (! leaf_function)
3895 {
3896 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
3897 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize);
3898 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
3899 {
3900 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
3901 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize - 4096);
3902 }
3903 else
3904 {
3905 build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
3906 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
3907 }
3908 }
3909 else /* leaf function */
3910 {
3911 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
3912 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize);
3913 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
3914 {
3915 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
3916 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize - 4096);
3917 }
3918 else
3919 {
3920 build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
3921 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
3922 }
3923 }
3924
3925 if (dwarf2out_do_frame () && actual_fsize)
3926 {
3927 char *label = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
3928
3929 /* The canonical frame address refers to the top of the frame. */
3930 dwarf2out_def_cfa (label, (leaf_function ? STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
3931 : HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM),
3932 frame_base_offset);
3933
3934 if (! leaf_function)
3935 {
3936 /* Note the register window save. This tells the unwinder that
3937 it needs to restore the window registers from the previous
3938 frame's window save area at 0(cfa). */
3939 dwarf2out_window_save (label);
3940
3941 /* The return address (-8) is now in %i7. */
3942 dwarf2out_return_reg (label, 31);
3943 }
3944 }
3945
3946 /* If doing anything with PIC, do it now. */
3947 if (! flag_pic)
3948 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 1\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
3949
3950 /* Call saved registers are saved just above the outgoing argument area. */
3951 if (num_gfregs)
3952 {
3953 int offset, real_offset, n_regs;
3954 const char *base;
3955
3956 real_offset = -apparent_fsize;
3957 offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
3958 if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096)
3959 {
3960 /* ??? This might be optimized a little as %g1 might already have a
3961 value close enough that a single add insn will do. */
3962 /* ??? Although, all of this is probably only a temporary fix
3963 because if %g1 can hold a function result, then
3964 output_function_epilogue will lose (the result will get
3965 clobbered). */
3966 build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
3967 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
3968 base = "%g1";
3969 offset = 0;
3970 }
3971 else
3972 {
3973 base = frame_base_name;
3974 }
3975
3976 n_regs = save_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0, real_offset);
3977 save_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs,
3978 real_offset);
3979 }
3980 }
3981
3982 /* Output code to restore any call saved registers. */
3983
3984 static void
3985 output_restore_regs (file, leaf_function)
3986 FILE *file;
3987 int leaf_function ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
3988 {
3989 int offset, n_regs;
3990 const char *base;
3991
3992 offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
3993 if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096 - 8 /*double*/)
3994 {
3995 build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
3996 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
3997 base = "%g1";
3998 offset = 0;
3999 }
4000 else
4001 {
4002 base = frame_base_name;
4003 }
4004
4005 n_regs = restore_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0);
4006 restore_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs);
4007 }
4008
4009 /* This function generates the assembly code for function exit,
4010 on machines that need it.
4011
4012 The function epilogue should not depend on the current stack pointer!
4013 It should use the frame pointer only. This is mandatory because
4014 of alloca; we also take advantage of it to omit stack adjustments
4015 before returning. */
4016
4017 static void
4018 sparc_output_function_epilogue (file, size)
4019 FILE *file;
4020 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
4021 {
4022 if (TARGET_FLAT)
4023 sparc_flat_function_epilogue (file, size);
4024 else
4025 sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue (file, size,
4026 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
4027 }
4028
4029 /* Output code for the function epilogue. */
4030
4031 static void
4032 sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue (file, size, leaf_function)
4033 FILE *file;
4034 HOST_WIDE_INT size ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4035 int leaf_function;
4036 {
4037 const char *ret;
4038
4039 if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list == 0)
4040 {
4041 /* If code does not drop into the epilogue, we need
4042 do nothing except output pending case vectors.
4043
4044 We have to still output a dummy nop for the sake of
4045 sane backtraces. Otherwise, if the last two instructions
4046 of a function were call foo; dslot; this can make the return
4047 PC of foo (ie. address of call instruction plus 8) point to
4048 the first instruction in the next function. */
4049 rtx insn;
4050
4051 fputs("\tnop\n", file);
4052
4053 insn = get_last_insn ();
4054 if (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE)
4055 insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
4056 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == BARRIER)
4057 goto output_vectors;
4058 }
4059
4060 if (num_gfregs)
4061 output_restore_regs (file, leaf_function);
4062
4063 /* Work out how to skip the caller's unimp instruction if required. */
4064 if (leaf_function)
4065 ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%o7+12" : "retl");
4066 else
4067 ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%i7+12" : "ret");
4068
4069 if (! leaf_function)
4070 {
4071 if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
4072 {
4073 if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
4074 abort ();
4075 if (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
4076 abort ();
4077
4078 fputs ("\trestore\n\tretl\n\tadd\t%sp, %g1, %sp\n", file);
4079 }
4080 /* If we wound up with things in our delay slot, flush them here. */
4081 else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
4082 {
4083 rtx delay = PATTERN (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0));
4084
4085 if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&delay, 1))
4086 {
4087 epilogue_renumber (&delay, 0);
4088 fputs (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P
4089 ? "\treturn\t%i7+12\n"
4090 : "\treturn\t%i7+8\n", file);
4091 final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
4092 file, 1, 0, 0);
4093 }
4094 else
4095 {
4096 rtx insn, src;
4097
4098 if (GET_CODE (delay) != SET)
4099 abort();
4100
4101 src = SET_SRC (delay);
4102 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT)
4103 {
4104 if (XEXP (src, 1) != const1_rtx)
4105 abort();
4106 SET_SRC (delay)
4107 = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (src), XEXP (src, 0),
4108 XEXP (src, 0));
4109 }
4110
4111 insn = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
4112 gen_rtvec (2, delay,
4113 gen_rtx_RETURN (VOIDmode)));
4114 insn = emit_jump_insn (insn);
4115
4116 sparc_emitting_epilogue = true;
4117 final_scan_insn (insn, file, 1, 0, 1);
4118 sparc_emitting_epilogue = false;
4119 }
4120 }
4121 else if (TARGET_V9 && ! SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
4122 fputs ("\treturn\t%i7+8\n\tnop\n", file);
4123 else
4124 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\trestore\n", ret);
4125 }
4126 /* All of the following cases are for leaf functions. */
4127 else if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
4128 abort ();
4129 else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
4130 {
4131 /* eligible_for_epilogue_delay_slot ensures that if this is a
4132 leaf function, then we will only have insn in the delay slot
4133 if the frame size is zero, thus no adjust for the stack is
4134 needed here. */
4135 if (actual_fsize != 0)
4136 abort ();
4137 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n", ret);
4138 final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
4139 file, 1, 0, 1);
4140 }
4141 /* Output 'nop' instead of 'sub %sp,-0,%sp' when no frame, so as to
4142 avoid generating confusing assembly language output. */
4143 else if (actual_fsize == 0)
4144 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tnop\n", ret);
4145 else if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
4146 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", ret, actual_fsize);
4147 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
4148 fprintf (file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n",
4149 ret, actual_fsize - 4096);
4150 else if ((actual_fsize & 0x3ff) == 0)
4151 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\t%s\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
4152 actual_fsize, ret);
4153 else
4154 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tor\t%%g1, %%lo(%d), %%g1\n\t%s\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
4155 actual_fsize, actual_fsize, ret);
4156
4157 output_vectors:
4158 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ();
4159 }
4160
4161 /* Output a sibling call. */
4162
4163 const char *
4164 output_sibcall (insn, call_operand)
4165 rtx insn, call_operand;
4166 {
4167 int leaf_regs = current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs;
4168 rtx operands[3];
4169 int delay_slot = dbr_sequence_length () > 0;
4170
4171 if (num_gfregs)
4172 {
4173 /* Call to restore global regs might clobber
4174 the delay slot. Instead of checking for this
4175 output the delay slot now. */
4176 if (delay_slot)
4177 {
4178 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);
4179
4180 if (! delay)
4181 abort ();
4182
4183 final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1);
4184 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
4185 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
4186 delay_slot = 0;
4187 }
4188 output_restore_regs (asm_out_file, leaf_regs);
4189 }
4190
4191 operands[0] = call_operand;
4192
4193 if (leaf_regs)
4194 {
4195 #ifdef HAVE_AS_RELAX_OPTION
4196 /* If as and ld are relaxing tail call insns into branch always,
4197 use or %o7,%g0,X; call Y; or X,%g0,%o7 always, so that it can
4198 be optimized. With sethi/jmpl as nor ld has no easy way how to
4199 find out if somebody does not branch between the sethi and jmpl. */
4200 int spare_slot = 0;
4201 #else
4202 int spare_slot = ((TARGET_ARCH32 || TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) && ! flag_pic);
4203 #endif
4204 int size = 0;
4205
4206 if ((actual_fsize || ! spare_slot) && delay_slot)
4207 {
4208 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);
4209
4210 if (! delay)
4211 abort ();
4212
4213 final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1);
4214 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
4215 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
4216 delay_slot = 0;
4217 }
4218 if (actual_fsize)
4219 {
4220 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
4221 size = actual_fsize;
4222 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
4223 {
4224 fputs ("\tsub\t%sp, -4096, %sp\n", asm_out_file);
4225 size = actual_fsize - 4096;
4226 }
4227 else if ((actual_fsize & 0x3ff) == 0)
4228 fprintf (asm_out_file,
4229 "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
4230 actual_fsize);
4231 else
4232 {
4233 fprintf (asm_out_file,
4234 "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tor\t%%g1, %%lo(%d), %%g1\n",
4235 actual_fsize, actual_fsize);
4236 fputs ("\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n", asm_out_file);
4237 }
4238 }
4239 if (spare_slot)
4240 {
4241 output_asm_insn ("sethi\t%%hi(%a0), %%g1", operands);
4242 output_asm_insn ("jmpl\t%%g1 + %%lo(%a0), %%g0", operands);
4243 if (size)
4244 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t sub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", size);
4245 else if (! delay_slot)
4246 fputs ("\t nop\n", asm_out_file);
4247 }
4248 else
4249 {
4250 if (size)
4251 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", size);
4252 /* Use or with rs2 %%g0 instead of mov, so that as/ld can optimize
4253 it into branch if possible. */
4254 output_asm_insn ("or\t%%o7, %%g0, %%g1", operands);
4255 output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
4256 output_asm_insn (" or\t%%g1, %%g0, %%o7", operands);
4257 }
4258 return "";
4259 }
4260
4261 output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
4262 if (delay_slot)
4263 {
4264 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn), pat;
4265
4266 if (! delay)
4267 abort ();
4268
4269 pat = PATTERN (delay);
4270 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
4271 abort ();
4272
4273 operands[0] = SET_DEST (pat);
4274 pat = SET_SRC (pat);
4275 switch (GET_CODE (pat))
4276 {
4277 case PLUS:
4278 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
4279 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
4280 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %2, %Y0", operands);
4281 break;
4282 case LO_SUM:
4283 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
4284 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
4285 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %%lo(%a2), %Y0", operands);
4286 break;
4287 case ASHIFT:
4288 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
4289 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %r1, %Y0", operands);
4290 break;
4291 default:
4292 operands[1] = pat;
4293 output_asm_insn (" restore %%g0, %1, %Y0", operands);
4294 break;
4295 }
4296 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
4297 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
4298 }
4299 else
4300 fputs ("\t restore\n", asm_out_file);
4301 return "";
4302 }
4303 \f
4304 /* Functions for handling argument passing.
4305
4306 For v8 the first six args are normally in registers and the rest are
4307 pushed. Any arg that starts within the first 6 words is at least
4308 partially passed in a register unless its data type forbids.
4309
4310 For v9, the argument registers are laid out as an array of 16 elements
4311 and arguments are added sequentially. The first 6 int args and up to the
4312 first 16 fp args (depending on size) are passed in regs.
4313
4314 Slot Stack Integral Float Float in structure Double Long Double
4315 ---- ----- -------- ----- ------------------ ------ -----------
4316 15 [SP+248] %f31 %f30,%f31 %d30
4317 14 [SP+240] %f29 %f28,%f29 %d28 %q28
4318 13 [SP+232] %f27 %f26,%f27 %d26
4319 12 [SP+224] %f25 %f24,%f25 %d24 %q24
4320 11 [SP+216] %f23 %f22,%f23 %d22
4321 10 [SP+208] %f21 %f20,%f21 %d20 %q20
4322 9 [SP+200] %f19 %f18,%f19 %d18
4323 8 [SP+192] %f17 %f16,%f17 %d16 %q16
4324 7 [SP+184] %f15 %f14,%f15 %d14
4325 6 [SP+176] %f13 %f12,%f13 %d12 %q12
4326 5 [SP+168] %o5 %f11 %f10,%f11 %d10
4327 4 [SP+160] %o4 %f9 %f8,%f9 %d8 %q8
4328 3 [SP+152] %o3 %f7 %f6,%f7 %d6
4329 2 [SP+144] %o2 %f5 %f4,%f5 %d4 %q4
4330 1 [SP+136] %o1 %f3 %f2,%f3 %d2
4331 0 [SP+128] %o0 %f1 %f0,%f1 %d0 %q0
4332
4333 Here SP = %sp if -mno-stack-bias or %sp+stack_bias otherwise.
4334
4335 Integral arguments are always passed as 64 bit quantities appropriately
4336 extended.
4337
4338 Passing of floating point values is handled as follows.
4339 If a prototype is in scope:
4340 If the value is in a named argument (i.e. not a stdarg function or a
4341 value not part of the `...') then the value is passed in the appropriate
4342 fp reg.
4343 If the value is part of the `...' and is passed in one of the first 6
4344 slots then the value is passed in the appropriate int reg.
4345 If the value is part of the `...' and is not passed in one of the first 6
4346 slots then the value is passed in memory.
4347 If a prototype is not in scope:
4348 If the value is one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in the
4349 appropriate integer reg and the appropriate fp reg.
4350 If the value is not one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in
4351 the appropriate fp reg and in memory.
4352 */
4353
4354 /* Maximum number of int regs for args. */
4355 #define SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX 6
4356 /* Maximum number of fp regs for args. */
4357 #define SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX 16
4358
4359 #define ROUND_ADVANCE(SIZE) (((SIZE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
4360
4361 /* Handle the INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS macro.
4362 Initialize a variable CUM of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS
4363 for a call to a function whose data type is FNTYPE.
4364 For a library call, FNTYPE is 0. */
4365
4366 void
4367 init_cumulative_args (cum, fntype, libname, fndecl)
4368 CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4369 tree fntype;
4370 rtx libname ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4371 tree fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
4372 {
4373 cum->words = 0;
4374 cum->prototype_p = fntype && TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype);
4375 cum->libcall_p = fntype == 0;
4376 }
4377
4378 /* Compute the slot number to pass an argument in.
4379 Returns the slot number or -1 if passing on the stack.
4380
4381 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
4382 the preceding args and about the function being called.
4383 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
4384 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
4385 This is null for libcalls where that information may
4386 not be available.
4387 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
4388 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
4389 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG.
4390 *PREGNO records the register number to use if scalar type.
4391 *PPADDING records the amount of padding needed in words. */
4392
4393 static int
4394 function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p, pregno, ppadding)
4395 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4396 enum machine_mode mode;
4397 tree type;
4398 int named;
4399 int incoming_p;
4400 int *pregno;
4401 int *ppadding;
4402 {
4403 int regbase = (incoming_p
4404 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4405 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
4406 int slotno = cum->words;
4407 int regno;
4408
4409 *ppadding = 0;
4410
4411 if (type != 0 && TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type))
4412 return -1;
4413 if (TARGET_ARCH32
4414 && type != 0 && mode == BLKmode
4415 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) % PARM_BOUNDARY != 0)
4416 return -1;
4417
4418 switch (mode)
4419 {
4420 case VOIDmode :
4421 /* MODE is VOIDmode when generating the actual call.
4422 See emit_call_1. */
4423 return -1;
4424
4425 case QImode : case CQImode :
4426 case HImode : case CHImode :
4427 case SImode : case CSImode :
4428 case DImode : case CDImode :
4429 case TImode : case CTImode :
4430 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4431 return -1;
4432 regno = regbase + slotno;
4433 break;
4434
4435 case SFmode : case SCmode :
4436 case DFmode : case DCmode :
4437 case TFmode : case TCmode :
4438 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4439 {
4440 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4441 return -1;
4442 regno = regbase + slotno;
4443 }
4444 else
4445 {
4446 if ((mode == TFmode || mode == TCmode)
4447 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
4448 slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
4449 if (TARGET_FPU && named)
4450 {
4451 if (slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
4452 return -1;
4453 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + slotno * 2;
4454 if (mode == SFmode)
4455 regno++;
4456 }
4457 else
4458 {
4459 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4460 return -1;
4461 regno = regbase + slotno;
4462 }
4463 }
4464 break;
4465
4466 case BLKmode :
4467 /* For sparc64, objects requiring 16 byte alignment get it. */
4468 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
4469 {
4470 if (type && TYPE_ALIGN (type) == 128 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
4471 slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
4472 }
4473
4474 if (TARGET_ARCH32
4475 || (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE))
4476 {
4477 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4478 return -1;
4479 regno = regbase + slotno;
4480 }
4481 else
4482 {
4483 tree field;
4484 int intregs_p = 0, fpregs_p = 0;
4485 /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed
4486 structures are passed. These are defined to be passed
4487 in int regs if possible, otherwise memory. */
4488 int packed_p = 0;
4489
4490 /* First see what kinds of registers we need. */
4491 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4492 {
4493 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
4494 {
4495 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
4496 && TARGET_FPU)
4497 fpregs_p = 1;
4498 else
4499 intregs_p = 1;
4500 if (DECL_PACKED (field))
4501 packed_p = 1;
4502 }
4503 }
4504 if (packed_p || !named)
4505 fpregs_p = 0, intregs_p = 1;
4506
4507 /* If all arg slots are filled, then must pass on stack. */
4508 if (fpregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
4509 return -1;
4510 /* If there are only int args and all int arg slots are filled,
4511 then must pass on stack. */
4512 if (!fpregs_p && intregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4513 return -1;
4514 /* Note that even if all int arg slots are filled, fp members may
4515 still be passed in regs if such regs are available.
4516 *PREGNO isn't set because there may be more than one, it's up
4517 to the caller to compute them. */
4518 return slotno;
4519 }
4520 break;
4521
4522 default :
4523 abort ();
4524 }
4525
4526 *pregno = regno;
4527 return slotno;
4528 }
4529
4530 /* Handle recursive register counting for structure field layout. */
4531
4532 struct function_arg_record_value_parms
4533 {
4534 rtx ret; /* return expression being built. */
4535 int slotno; /* slot number of the argument. */
4536 int named; /* whether the argument is named. */
4537 int regbase; /* regno of the base register. */
4538 int stack; /* 1 if part of the argument is on the stack. */
4539 int intoffset; /* offset of the pending integer field. */
4540 unsigned int nregs; /* number of words passed in registers. */
4541 };
4542
4543 static void function_arg_record_value_3
4544 PARAMS ((HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *));
4545 static void function_arg_record_value_2
4546 PARAMS ((tree, HOST_WIDE_INT,
4547 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *));
4548 static void function_arg_record_value_1
4549 PARAMS ((tree, HOST_WIDE_INT,
4550 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *));
4551 static rtx function_arg_record_value
4552 PARAMS ((tree, enum machine_mode, int, int, int));
4553
4554 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure
4555 recursively and determine how many registers will be required. */
4556
4557 static void
4558 function_arg_record_value_1 (type, startbitpos, parms)
4559 tree type;
4560 HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos;
4561 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms;
4562 {
4563 tree field;
4564
4565 /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed structures are
4566 passed. These are defined to be passed in int regs if possible,
4567 otherwise memory. */
4568 int packed_p = 0;
4569
4570 /* We need to compute how many registers are needed so we can
4571 allocate the PARALLEL but before we can do that we need to know
4572 whether there are any packed fields. If there are, int regs are
4573 used regardless of whether there are fp values present. */
4574 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4575 {
4576 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
4577 {
4578 packed_p = 1;
4579 break;
4580 }
4581 }
4582
4583 /* Compute how many registers we need. */
4584 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4585 {
4586 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
4587 {
4588 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;
4589
4590 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
4591 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
4592 bitpos += int_bit_position (field);
4593
4594 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */
4595
4596 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
4597 function_arg_record_value_1 (TREE_TYPE (field), bitpos, parms);
4598 else if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
4599 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE
4600 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field)))
4601 == REAL_TYPE)))
4602 && TARGET_FPU
4603 && ! packed_p
4604 && parms->named)
4605 {
4606 if (parms->intoffset != -1)
4607 {
4608 int intslots, this_slotno;
4609
4610 intslots = (bitpos - parms->intoffset + BITS_PER_WORD - 1)
4611 / BITS_PER_WORD;
4612 this_slotno = parms->slotno + parms->intoffset
4613 / BITS_PER_WORD;
4614
4615 if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno)
4616 {
4617 intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
4618 /* We need to pass this field on the stack. */
4619 parms->stack = 1;
4620 }
4621
4622 parms->nregs += intslots;
4623 parms->intoffset = -1;
4624 }
4625
4626 /* There's no need to check this_slotno < SPARC_FP_ARG MAX.
4627 If it wasn't true we wouldn't be here. */
4628 parms->nregs += 1;
4629 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
4630 parms->nregs += 1;
4631 }
4632 else
4633 {
4634 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
4635 parms->intoffset = bitpos;
4636 }
4637 }
4638 }
4639 }
4640
4641 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Assign the bits of the
4642 structure between parms->intoffset and bitpos to integer registers. */
4643
4644 static void
4645 function_arg_record_value_3 (bitpos, parms)
4646 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos;
4647 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms;
4648 {
4649 enum machine_mode mode;
4650 unsigned int regno;
4651 unsigned int startbit, endbit;
4652 int this_slotno, intslots, intoffset;
4653 rtx reg;
4654
4655 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
4656 return;
4657
4658 intoffset = parms->intoffset;
4659 parms->intoffset = -1;
4660
4661 startbit = intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4662 endbit = (bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4663 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
4664 this_slotno = parms->slotno + intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;
4665
4666 intslots = MIN (intslots, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
4667 if (intslots <= 0)
4668 return;
4669
4670 /* If this is the trailing part of a word, only load that much into
4671 the register. Otherwise load the whole register. Note that in
4672 the latter case we may pick up unwanted bits. It's not a problem
4673 at the moment but may wish to revisit. */
4674
4675 if (intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD != 0)
4676 mode = mode_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD - intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD,
4677 MODE_INT, 0);
4678 else
4679 mode = word_mode;
4680
4681 intoffset /= BITS_PER_UNIT;
4682 do
4683 {
4684 regno = parms->regbase + this_slotno;
4685 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4686 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
4687 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, GEN_INT (intoffset));
4688
4689 this_slotno += 1;
4690 intoffset = (intoffset | (UNITS_PER_WORD-1)) + 1;
4691 parms->nregs += 1;
4692 intslots -= 1;
4693 }
4694 while (intslots > 0);
4695 }
4696
4697 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure
4698 recursively and assign bits to floating point registers. Track which
4699 bits in between need integer registers; invoke function_arg_record_value_3
4700 to make that happen. */
4701
4702 static void
4703 function_arg_record_value_2 (type, startbitpos, parms)
4704 tree type;
4705 HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos;
4706 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms;
4707 {
4708 tree field;
4709 int packed_p = 0;
4710
4711 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4712 {
4713 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
4714 {
4715 packed_p = 1;
4716 break;
4717 }
4718 }
4719
4720 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4721 {
4722 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
4723 {
4724 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;
4725
4726 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
4727 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
4728 bitpos += int_bit_position (field);
4729
4730 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */
4731
4732 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
4733 function_arg_record_value_2 (TREE_TYPE (field), bitpos, parms);
4734 else if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
4735 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE
4736 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field)))
4737 == REAL_TYPE)))
4738 && TARGET_FPU
4739 && ! packed_p
4740 && parms->named)
4741 {
4742 int this_slotno = parms->slotno + bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD;
4743 int regno;
4744 enum machine_mode mode = DECL_MODE (field);
4745 rtx reg;
4746
4747 function_arg_record_value_3 (bitpos, parms);
4748 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + this_slotno * 2
4749 + ((mode == SFmode || mode == SCmode)
4750 && (bitpos & 32) != 0);
4751 switch (mode)
4752 {
4753 case SCmode: mode = SFmode; break;
4754 case DCmode: mode = DFmode; break;
4755 case TCmode: mode = TFmode; break;
4756 default: break;
4757 }
4758 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4759 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
4760 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
4761 GEN_INT (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT));
4762 parms->nregs += 1;
4763 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
4764 {
4765 regno += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / 4;
4766 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4767 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
4768 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
4769 GEN_INT ((bitpos + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
4770 / BITS_PER_UNIT));
4771 parms->nregs += 1;
4772 }
4773 }
4774 else
4775 {
4776 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
4777 parms->intoffset = bitpos;
4778 }
4779 }
4780 }
4781 }
4782
4783 /* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the complex
4784 conventions of the 64-bit ABI for passing and returning structures.
4785 Return an expression valid as a return value for the two macros
4786 FUNCTION_ARG and FUNCTION_VALUE.
4787
4788 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
4789 This is null for libcalls where that information may
4790 not be available.
4791 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
4792 SLOTNO is the index number of the argument's slot in the parameter array.
4793 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
4794 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
4795 REGBASE is the regno of the base register for the parameter array. */
4796
4797 static rtx
4798 function_arg_record_value (type, mode, slotno, named, regbase)
4799 tree type;
4800 enum machine_mode mode;
4801 int slotno, named, regbase;
4802 {
4803 HOST_WIDE_INT typesize = int_size_in_bytes (type);
4804 struct function_arg_record_value_parms parms;
4805 unsigned int nregs;
4806
4807 parms.ret = NULL_RTX;
4808 parms.slotno = slotno;
4809 parms.named = named;
4810 parms.regbase = regbase;
4811 parms.stack = 0;
4812
4813 /* Compute how many registers we need. */
4814 parms.nregs = 0;
4815 parms.intoffset = 0;
4816 function_arg_record_value_1 (type, 0, &parms);
4817
4818 if (parms.intoffset != -1)
4819 {
4820 unsigned int startbit, endbit;
4821 int intslots, this_slotno;
4822
4823 startbit = parms.intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4824 endbit = (typesize*BITS_PER_UNIT + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
4825 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
4826 this_slotno = slotno + parms.intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;
4827
4828 if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno)
4829 {
4830 intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
4831 /* We need to pass this field on the stack. */
4832 parms.stack = 1;
4833 }
4834
4835 parms.nregs += intslots;
4836 }
4837 nregs = parms.nregs;
4838
4839 /* Allocate the vector and handle some annoying special cases. */
4840 if (nregs == 0)
4841 {
4842 /* ??? Empty structure has no value? Duh? */
4843 if (typesize <= 0)
4844 {
4845 /* Though there's nothing really to store, return a word register
4846 anyway so the rest of gcc doesn't go nuts. Returning a PARALLEL
4847 leads to breakage due to the fact that there are zero bytes to
4848 load. */
4849 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regbase);
4850 }
4851 else
4852 {
4853 /* ??? C++ has structures with no fields, and yet a size. Give up
4854 for now and pass everything back in integer registers. */
4855 nregs = (typesize + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
4856 }
4857 if (nregs + slotno > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4858 nregs = SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - slotno;
4859 }
4860 if (nregs == 0)
4861 abort ();
4862
4863 parms.ret = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, rtvec_alloc (parms.stack + nregs));
4864
4865 /* If at least one field must be passed on the stack, generate
4866 (parallel [(expr_list (nil) ...) ...]) so that all fields will
4867 also be passed on the stack. We can't do much better because the
4868 semantics of FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS doesn't handle the case
4869 of structures for which the fields passed exclusively in registers
4870 are not at the beginning of the structure. */
4871 if (parms.stack)
4872 XVECEXP (parms.ret, 0, 0)
4873 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx);
4874
4875 /* Fill in the entries. */
4876 parms.nregs = 0;
4877 parms.intoffset = 0;
4878 function_arg_record_value_2 (type, 0, &parms);
4879 function_arg_record_value_3 (typesize * BITS_PER_UNIT, &parms);
4880
4881 if (parms.nregs != nregs)
4882 abort ();
4883
4884 return parms.ret;
4885 }
4886
4887 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG macro.
4888 Determine where to put an argument to a function.
4889 Value is zero to push the argument on the stack,
4890 or a hard register in which to store the argument.
4891
4892 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
4893 the preceding args and about the function being called.
4894 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
4895 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
4896 This is null for libcalls where that information may
4897 not be available.
4898 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
4899 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
4900 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG. */
4901
4902 rtx
4903 function_arg (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p)
4904 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
4905 enum machine_mode mode;
4906 tree type;
4907 int named;
4908 int incoming_p;
4909 {
4910 int regbase = (incoming_p
4911 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4912 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
4913 int slotno, regno, padding;
4914 rtx reg;
4915
4916 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p,
4917 &regno, &padding);
4918
4919 if (slotno == -1)
4920 return 0;
4921
4922 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4923 {
4924 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4925 return reg;
4926 }
4927
4928 /* v9 fp args in reg slots beyond the int reg slots get passed in regs
4929 but also have the slot allocated for them.
4930 If no prototype is in scope fp values in register slots get passed
4931 in two places, either fp regs and int regs or fp regs and memory. */
4932 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
4933 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
4934 && SPARC_FP_REG_P (regno))
4935 {
4936 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
4937 if (cum->prototype_p || cum->libcall_p)
4938 {
4939 /* "* 2" because fp reg numbers are recorded in 4 byte
4940 quantities. */
4941 #if 0
4942 /* ??? This will cause the value to be passed in the fp reg and
4943 in the stack. When a prototype exists we want to pass the
4944 value in the reg but reserve space on the stack. That's an
4945 optimization, and is deferred [for a bit]. */
4946 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
4947 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode,
4948 gen_rtvec (2,
4949 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
4950 NULL_RTX, const0_rtx),
4951 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
4952 reg, const0_rtx)));
4953 else
4954 #else
4955 /* ??? It seems that passing back a register even when past
4956 the area declared by REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE will allocate
4957 space appropriately, and will not copy the data onto the
4958 stack, exactly as we desire.
4959
4960 This is due to locate_and_pad_parm being called in
4961 expand_call whenever reg_parm_stack_space > 0, which
4962 while beneficial to our example here, would seem to be
4963 in error from what had been intended. Ho hum... -- r~ */
4964 #endif
4965 return reg;
4966 }
4967 else
4968 {
4969 rtx v0, v1;
4970
4971 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) < SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
4972 {
4973 int intreg;
4974
4975 /* On incoming, we don't need to know that the value
4976 is passed in %f0 and %i0, and it confuses other parts
4977 causing needless spillage even on the simplest cases. */
4978 if (incoming_p)
4979 return reg;
4980
4981 intreg = (SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4982 + (regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) / 2);
4983
4984 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
4985 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_REG (mode, intreg),
4986 const0_rtx);
4987 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
4988 }
4989 else
4990 {
4991 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx);
4992 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
4993 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
4994 }
4995 }
4996 }
4997 else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
4998 {
4999 /* Structures up to 16 bytes in size are passed in arg slots on the
5000 stack and are promoted to registers where possible. */
5001
5002 if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16)
5003 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
5004
5005 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, slotno, named, regbase);
5006 }
5007 else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
5008 {
5009 enum machine_mode mode;
5010 int bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5011
5012 if (bytes > 16)
5013 abort ();
5014
5015 mode = mode_for_size (bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
5016 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5017 }
5018 else
5019 {
5020 /* Scalar or complex int. */
5021 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5022 }
5023
5024 return reg;
5025 }
5026
5027 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS macro.
5028 For an arg passed partly in registers and partly in memory,
5029 this is the number of registers used.
5030 For args passed entirely in registers or entirely in memory, zero.
5031
5032 Any arg that starts in the first 6 regs but won't entirely fit in them
5033 needs partial registers on v8. On v9, structures with integer
5034 values in arg slots 5,6 will be passed in %o5 and SP+176, and complex fp
5035 values that begin in the last fp reg [where "last fp reg" varies with the
5036 mode] will be split between that reg and memory. */
5037
5038 int
5039 function_arg_partial_nregs (cum, mode, type, named)
5040 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
5041 enum machine_mode mode;
5042 tree type;
5043 int named;
5044 {
5045 int slotno, regno, padding;
5046
5047 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */
5048 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);
5049
5050 if (slotno == -1)
5051 return 0;
5052
5053 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5054 {
5055 if ((slotno + (mode == BLKmode
5056 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type))
5057 : ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))))
5058 > NPARM_REGS (SImode))
5059 return NPARM_REGS (SImode) - slotno;
5060 return 0;
5061 }
5062 else
5063 {
5064 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5065 {
5066 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5067 int align = TYPE_ALIGN (type);
5068
5069 if (align == 16)
5070 slotno += slotno & 1;
5071 if (size > 8 && size <= 16
5072 && slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
5073 return 1;
5074 }
5075 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
5076 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
5077 && ! (TARGET_FPU && named)))
5078 {
5079 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
5080 {
5081 slotno += slotno & 1;
5082 if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 2)
5083 return 1;
5084 }
5085 else
5086 {
5087 if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
5088 return 1;
5089 }
5090 }
5091 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
5092 {
5093 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
5094 slotno += slotno & 1;
5095 if ((slotno + GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
5096 > SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
5097 return 1;
5098 }
5099 return 0;
5100 }
5101 }
5102
5103 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE macro.
5104 !v9: The SPARC ABI stipulates passing struct arguments (of any size) and
5105 quad-precision floats by invisible reference.
5106 v9: Aggregates greater than 16 bytes are passed by reference.
5107 For Pascal, also pass arrays by reference. */
5108
5109 int
5110 function_arg_pass_by_reference (cum, mode, type, named)
5111 const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
5112 enum machine_mode mode;
5113 tree type;
5114 int named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
5115 {
5116 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5117 {
5118 return ((type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5119 || mode == TFmode || mode == TCmode);
5120 }
5121 else
5122 {
5123 return ((type && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE)
5124 /* Consider complex values as aggregates, so care for TCmode. */
5125 || GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > 16
5126 || (type
5127 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
5128 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16));
5129 }
5130 }
5131
5132 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE macro.
5133 Update the data in CUM to advance over an argument
5134 of mode MODE and data type TYPE.
5135 TYPE is null for libcalls where that information may not be available. */
5136
5137 void
5138 function_arg_advance (cum, mode, type, named)
5139 CUMULATIVE_ARGS *cum;
5140 enum machine_mode mode;
5141 tree type;
5142 int named;
5143 {
5144 int slotno, regno, padding;
5145
5146 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */
5147 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);
5148
5149 /* If register required leading padding, add it. */
5150 if (slotno != -1)
5151 cum->words += padding;
5152
5153 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5154 {
5155 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
5156 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5157 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
5158 }
5159 else
5160 {
5161 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5162 {
5163 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5164
5165 if (size <= 8)
5166 ++cum->words;
5167 else if (size <= 16)
5168 cum->words += 2;
5169 else /* passed by reference */
5170 ++cum->words;
5171 }
5172 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT)
5173 {
5174 cum->words += 2;
5175 }
5176 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
5177 {
5178 cum->words += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
5179 }
5180 else
5181 {
5182 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
5183 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5184 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
5185 }
5186 }
5187 }
5188
5189 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING macro.
5190 For the 64 bit ABI structs are always stored left shifted in their
5191 argument slot. */
5192
5193 enum direction
5194 function_arg_padding (mode, type)
5195 enum machine_mode mode;
5196 tree type;
5197 {
5198 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type != 0 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5199 return upward;
5200
5201 /* This is the default definition. */
5202 return (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
5203 ? upward
5204 : ((mode == BLKmode
5205 ? (type && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) == INTEGER_CST
5206 && int_size_in_bytes (type) < (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT))
5207 : GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < PARM_BOUNDARY)
5208 ? downward : upward));
5209 }
5210
5211 /* Handle FUNCTION_VALUE, FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE, and LIBCALL_VALUE macros.
5212 For v9, function return values are subject to the same rules as arguments,
5213 except that up to 32-bytes may be returned in registers. */
5214
5215 rtx
5216 function_value (type, mode, incoming_p)
5217 tree type;
5218 enum machine_mode mode;
5219 int incoming_p;
5220 {
5221 int regno;
5222 int regbase = (incoming_p
5223 ? SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
5224 : SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
5225
5226 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type)
5227 {
5228 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
5229 {
5230 /* Structures up to 32 bytes in size are passed in registers,
5231 promoted to fp registers where possible. */
5232
5233 if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 32)
5234 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
5235
5236 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, 0, 1, regbase);
5237 }
5238 else if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5239 {
5240 /* All other aggregate types are passed in an integer register
5241 in a mode corresponding to the size of the type. */
5242 HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5243
5244 if (bytes > 32)
5245 abort ();
5246
5247 mode = mode_for_size (bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
5248 }
5249 }
5250
5251 if (TARGET_ARCH64
5252 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5253 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD
5254 && type && ! AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5255 mode = DImode;
5256
5257 if (incoming_p)
5258 regno = BASE_RETURN_VALUE_REG (mode);
5259 else
5260 regno = BASE_OUTGOING_VALUE_REG (mode);
5261
5262 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5263 }
5264
5265 /* Do what is necessary for `va_start'. We look at the current function
5266 to determine if stdarg or varargs is used and return the address of
5267 the first unnamed parameter. */
5268
5269 rtx
5270 sparc_builtin_saveregs ()
5271 {
5272 int first_reg = current_function_args_info.words;
5273 rtx address;
5274 int regno;
5275
5276 for (regno = first_reg; regno < NPARM_REGS (word_mode); regno++)
5277 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (word_mode,
5278 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
5279 frame_pointer_rtx,
5280 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
5281 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
5282 * regno)))),
5283 gen_rtx_REG (word_mode,
5284 BASE_INCOMING_ARG_REG (word_mode) + regno));
5285
5286 address = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
5287 frame_pointer_rtx,
5288 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
5289 + UNITS_PER_WORD * first_reg));
5290
5291 return address;
5292 }
5293
5294 /* Implement `va_start' for varargs and stdarg. */
5295
5296 void
5297 sparc_va_start (valist, nextarg)
5298 tree valist;
5299 rtx nextarg;
5300 {
5301 nextarg = expand_builtin_saveregs ();
5302 std_expand_builtin_va_start (valist, nextarg);
5303 }
5304
5305 /* Implement `va_arg'. */
5306
5307 rtx
5308 sparc_va_arg (valist, type)
5309 tree valist, type;
5310 {
5311 HOST_WIDE_INT size, rsize, align;
5312 tree addr, incr;
5313 rtx addr_rtx;
5314 int indirect = 0;
5315
5316 /* Round up sizeof(type) to a word. */
5317 size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5318 rsize = (size + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -UNITS_PER_WORD;
5319 align = 0;
5320
5321 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
5322 {
5323 if (TYPE_ALIGN (type) >= 2 * (unsigned) BITS_PER_WORD)
5324 align = 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
5325
5326 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5327 {
5328 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) size > 16)
5329 {
5330 indirect = 1;
5331 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
5332 align = 0;
5333 }
5334 /* SPARC v9 ABI states that structures up to 8 bytes in size are
5335 given one 8 byte slot. */
5336 else if (size == 0)
5337 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
5338 else
5339 size = rsize;
5340 }
5341 }
5342 else
5343 {
5344 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
5345 || TYPE_MODE (type) == TFmode
5346 || TYPE_MODE (type) == TCmode)
5347 {
5348 indirect = 1;
5349 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
5350 }
5351 }
5352
5353 incr = valist;
5354 if (align)
5355 {
5356 incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5357 build_int_2 (align - 1, 0)));
5358 incr = fold (build (BIT_AND_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5359 build_int_2 (-align, -1)));
5360 }
5361
5362 addr = incr = save_expr (incr);
5363 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && size < rsize)
5364 {
5365 addr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5366 build_int_2 (rsize - size, 0)));
5367 }
5368 incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5369 build_int_2 (rsize, 0)));
5370
5371 incr = build (MODIFY_EXPR, ptr_type_node, valist, incr);
5372 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (incr) = 1;
5373 expand_expr (incr, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5374
5375 addr_rtx = expand_expr (addr, NULL, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5376
5377 /* If the address isn't aligned properly for the type,
5378 we may need to copy to a temporary.
5379 FIXME: This is inefficient. Usually we can do this
5380 in registers. */
5381 if (align == 0
5382 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) > BITS_PER_WORD
5383 && !indirect)
5384 {
5385 /* FIXME: We really need to specify that the temporary is live
5386 for the whole function because expand_builtin_va_arg wants
5387 the alias set to be get_varargs_alias_set (), but in this
5388 case the alias set is that for TYPE and if the memory gets
5389 reused it will be reused with alias set TYPE. */
5390 rtx tmp = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 0);
5391 rtx dest_addr;
5392
5393 addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5394 addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, addr_rtx);
5395 set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
5396 set_mem_align (addr_rtx, BITS_PER_WORD);
5397 tmp = shallow_copy_rtx (tmp);
5398 PUT_MODE (tmp, BLKmode);
5399 set_mem_alias_set (tmp, 0);
5400
5401 dest_addr = emit_block_move (tmp, addr_rtx, GEN_INT (rsize),
5402 BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5403 if (dest_addr != NULL_RTX)
5404 addr_rtx = dest_addr;
5405 else
5406 addr_rtx = XCEXP (tmp, 0, MEM);
5407 }
5408
5409 if (indirect)
5410 {
5411 addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5412 addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5413 set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
5414 }
5415
5416 return addr_rtx;
5417 }
5418 \f
5419 /* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, which is
5420 the operand number of the label. OP is the conditional expression.
5421 XEXP (OP, 0) is assumed to be a condition code register (integer or
5422 floating point) and its mode specifies what kind of comparison we made.
5423
5424 REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.
5425
5426 ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch.
5427
5428 NOOP is nonzero if we have to follow this branch by a noop.
5429
5430 INSN, if set, is the insn. */
5431
5432 char *
5433 output_cbranch (op, dest, label, reversed, annul, noop, insn)
5434 rtx op, dest;
5435 int label;
5436 int reversed, annul, noop;
5437 rtx insn;
5438 {
5439 static char string[50];
5440 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
5441 rtx cc_reg = XEXP (op, 0);
5442 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (cc_reg);
5443 const char *labelno, *branch;
5444 int spaces = 8, far;
5445 char *p;
5446
5447 /* v9 branches are limited to +-1MB. If it is too far away,
5448 change
5449
5450 bne,pt %xcc, .LC30
5451
5452 to
5453
5454 be,pn %xcc, .+12
5455 nop
5456 ba .LC30
5457
5458 and
5459
5460 fbne,a,pn %fcc2, .LC29
5461
5462 to
5463
5464 fbe,pt %fcc2, .+16
5465 nop
5466 ba .LC29 */
5467
5468 far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;
5469 if (reversed ^ far)
5470 {
5471 /* Reversal of FP compares takes care -- an ordered compare
5472 becomes an unordered compare and vice versa. */
5473 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
5474 code = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (code);
5475 else
5476 code = reverse_condition (code);
5477 }
5478
5479 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */
5480 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
5481 {
5482 switch (code)
5483 {
5484 case NE:
5485 branch = "fbne";
5486 break;
5487 case EQ:
5488 branch = "fbe";
5489 break;
5490 case GE:
5491 branch = "fbge";
5492 break;
5493 case GT:
5494 branch = "fbg";
5495 break;
5496 case LE:
5497 branch = "fble";
5498 break;
5499 case LT:
5500 branch = "fbl";
5501 break;
5502 case UNORDERED:
5503 branch = "fbu";
5504 break;
5505 case ORDERED:
5506 branch = "fbo";
5507 break;
5508 case UNGT:
5509 branch = "fbug";
5510 break;
5511 case UNLT:
5512 branch = "fbul";
5513 break;
5514 case UNEQ:
5515 branch = "fbue";
5516 break;
5517 case UNGE:
5518 branch = "fbuge";
5519 break;
5520 case UNLE:
5521 branch = "fbule";
5522 break;
5523 case LTGT:
5524 branch = "fblg";
5525 break;
5526
5527 default:
5528 abort ();
5529 }
5530
5531 /* ??? !v9: FP branches cannot be preceded by another floating point
5532 insn. Because there is currently no concept of pre-delay slots,
5533 we can fix this only by always emitting a nop before a floating
5534 point branch. */
5535
5536 string[0] = '\0';
5537 if (! TARGET_V9)
5538 strcpy (string, "nop\n\t");
5539 strcat (string, branch);
5540 }
5541 else
5542 {
5543 switch (code)
5544 {
5545 case NE:
5546 branch = "bne";
5547 break;
5548 case EQ:
5549 branch = "be";
5550 break;
5551 case GE:
5552 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
5553 branch = "bpos";
5554 else
5555 branch = "bge";
5556 break;
5557 case GT:
5558 branch = "bg";
5559 break;
5560 case LE:
5561 branch = "ble";
5562 break;
5563 case LT:
5564 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
5565 branch = "bneg";
5566 else
5567 branch = "bl";
5568 break;
5569 case GEU:
5570 branch = "bgeu";
5571 break;
5572 case GTU:
5573 branch = "bgu";
5574 break;
5575 case LEU:
5576 branch = "bleu";
5577 break;
5578 case LTU:
5579 branch = "blu";
5580 break;
5581
5582 default:
5583 abort ();
5584 }
5585 strcpy (string, branch);
5586 }
5587 spaces -= strlen (branch);
5588 p = strchr (string, '\0');
5589
5590 /* Now add the annulling, the label, and a possible noop. */
5591 if (annul && ! far)
5592 {
5593 strcpy (p, ",a");
5594 p += 2;
5595 spaces -= 2;
5596 }
5597
5598 if (! TARGET_V9)
5599 labelno = "";
5600 else
5601 {
5602 rtx note;
5603 int v8 = 0;
5604
5605 if (! far && insn && INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
5606 {
5607 int delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
5608 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
5609 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */
5610 if (delta < -260000 || delta >= 260000)
5611 v8 = 1;
5612 }
5613
5614 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
5615 {
5616 static char v9_fcc_labelno[] = "%%fccX, ";
5617 /* Set the char indicating the number of the fcc reg to use. */
5618 v9_fcc_labelno[5] = REGNO (cc_reg) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG + '0';
5619 labelno = v9_fcc_labelno;
5620 if (v8)
5621 {
5622 if (REGNO (cc_reg) == SPARC_FCC_REG)
5623 labelno = "";
5624 else
5625 abort ();
5626 }
5627 }
5628 else if (mode == CCXmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
5629 {
5630 labelno = "%%xcc, ";
5631 if (v8)
5632 abort ();
5633 }
5634 else
5635 {
5636 labelno = "%%icc, ";
5637 if (v8)
5638 labelno = "";
5639 }
5640
5641 if (*labelno && insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
5642 {
5643 strcpy (p,
5644 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
5645 ? ",pt" : ",pn");
5646 p += 3;
5647 spaces -= 3;
5648 }
5649 }
5650 if (spaces > 0)
5651 *p++ = '\t';
5652 else
5653 *p++ = ' ';
5654 strcpy (p, labelno);
5655 p = strchr (p, '\0');
5656 if (far)
5657 {
5658 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\tb\t");
5659 if (annul || noop)
5660 p[3] = '6';
5661 p += 13;
5662 }
5663 *p++ = '%';
5664 *p++ = 'l';
5665 /* Set the char indicating the number of the operand containing the
5666 label_ref. */
5667 *p++ = label + '0';
5668 *p = '\0';
5669 if (noop)
5670 strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");
5671
5672 return string;
5673 }
5674
5675 /* Emit a library call comparison between floating point X and Y.
5676 COMPARISON is the rtl operator to compare with (EQ, NE, GT, etc.).
5677 TARGET_ARCH64 uses _Qp_* functions, which use pointers to TFmode
5678 values as arguments instead of the TFmode registers themselves,
5679 that's why we cannot call emit_float_lib_cmp. */
5680 void
5681 sparc_emit_float_lib_cmp (x, y, comparison)
5682 rtx x, y;
5683 enum rtx_code comparison;
5684 {
5685 const char *qpfunc;
5686 rtx slot0, slot1, result, tem, tem2;
5687 enum machine_mode mode;
5688
5689 switch (comparison)
5690 {
5691 case EQ:
5692 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_feq" : "_Q_feq";
5693 break;
5694
5695 case NE:
5696 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fne" : "_Q_fne";
5697 break;
5698
5699 case GT:
5700 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fgt" : "_Q_fgt";
5701 break;
5702
5703 case GE:
5704 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fge" : "_Q_fge";
5705 break;
5706
5707 case LT:
5708 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_flt" : "_Q_flt";
5709 break;
5710
5711 case LE:
5712 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fle" : "_Q_fle";
5713 break;
5714
5715 case ORDERED:
5716 case UNORDERED:
5717 case UNGT:
5718 case UNLT:
5719 case UNEQ:
5720 case UNGE:
5721 case UNLE:
5722 case LTGT:
5723 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_cmp" : "_Q_cmp";
5724 break;
5725
5726 default:
5727 abort();
5728 break;
5729 }
5730
5731 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
5732 {
5733 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
5734 {
5735 slot0 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
5736 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot0, x));
5737 }
5738 else
5739 slot0 = x;
5740
5741 if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
5742 {
5743 slot1 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
5744 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot1, y));
5745 }
5746 else
5747 slot1 = y;
5748
5749 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), LCT_NORMAL,
5750 DImode, 2,
5751 XEXP (slot0, 0), Pmode,
5752 XEXP (slot1, 0), Pmode);
5753
5754 mode = DImode;
5755 }
5756 else
5757 {
5758 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), LCT_NORMAL,
5759 SImode, 2,
5760 x, TFmode, y, TFmode);
5761
5762 mode = SImode;
5763 }
5764
5765
5766 /* Immediately move the result of the libcall into a pseudo
5767 register so reload doesn't clobber the value if it needs
5768 the return register for a spill reg. */
5769 result = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5770 emit_move_insn (result, hard_libcall_value (mode));
5771
5772 switch (comparison)
5773 {
5774 default:
5775 emit_cmp_insn (result, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5776 break;
5777 case ORDERED:
5778 case UNORDERED:
5779 emit_cmp_insn (result, GEN_INT(3), comparison == UNORDERED ? EQ : NE,
5780 NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5781 break;
5782 case UNGT:
5783 case UNGE:
5784 emit_cmp_insn (result, const1_rtx,
5785 comparison == UNGT ? GT : NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5786 break;
5787 case UNLE:
5788 emit_cmp_insn (result, const2_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5789 break;
5790 case UNLT:
5791 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5792 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5793 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5794 else
5795 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5796 emit_cmp_insn (tem, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5797 break;
5798 case UNEQ:
5799 case LTGT:
5800 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5801 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5802 emit_insn (gen_addsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5803 else
5804 emit_insn (gen_adddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
5805 tem2 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5806 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5807 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
5808 else
5809 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
5810 emit_cmp_insn (tem2, const0_rtx, comparison == UNEQ ? EQ : NE,
5811 NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
5812 break;
5813 }
5814 }
5815
5816 /* Generate an unsigned DImode to FP conversion. This is the same code
5817 optabs would emit if we didn't have TFmode patterns. */
5818
5819 void
5820 sparc_emit_floatunsdi (operands)
5821 rtx operands[2];
5822 {
5823 rtx neglab, donelab, i0, i1, f0, in, out;
5824 enum machine_mode mode;
5825
5826 out = operands[0];
5827 in = force_reg (DImode, operands[1]);
5828 mode = GET_MODE (out);
5829 neglab = gen_label_rtx ();
5830 donelab = gen_label_rtx ();
5831 i0 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
5832 i1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
5833 f0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
5834
5835 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (in, const0_rtx, LT, const0_rtx, DImode, 0, neglab);
5836
5837 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, in)));
5838 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (donelab));
5839 emit_barrier ();
5840
5841 emit_label (neglab);
5842
5843 emit_insn (gen_lshrdi3 (i0, in, const1_rtx));
5844 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (i1, in, const1_rtx));
5845 emit_insn (gen_iordi3 (i0, i0, i1));
5846 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, f0, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, i0)));
5847 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, f0, f0)));
5848
5849 emit_label (donelab);
5850 }
5851
5852 /* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, testing
5853 register REG. LABEL is the operand number of the label; REG is the
5854 operand number of the reg. OP is the conditional expression. The mode
5855 of REG says what kind of comparison we made.
5856
5857 REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.
5858
5859 ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch.
5860
5861 NOOP is nonzero if we have to follow this branch by a noop. */
5862
5863 char *
5864 output_v9branch (op, dest, reg, label, reversed, annul, noop, insn)
5865 rtx op, dest;
5866 int reg, label;
5867 int reversed, annul, noop;
5868 rtx insn;
5869 {
5870 static char string[50];
5871 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
5872 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0));
5873 rtx note;
5874 int far;
5875 char *p;
5876
5877 /* branch on register are limited to +-128KB. If it is too far away,
5878 change
5879
5880 brnz,pt %g1, .LC30
5881
5882 to
5883
5884 brz,pn %g1, .+12
5885 nop
5886 ba,pt %xcc, .LC30
5887
5888 and
5889
5890 brgez,a,pn %o1, .LC29
5891
5892 to
5893
5894 brlz,pt %o1, .+16
5895 nop
5896 ba,pt %xcc, .LC29 */
5897
5898 far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;
5899
5900 /* If not floating-point or if EQ or NE, we can just reverse the code. */
5901 if (reversed ^ far)
5902 code = reverse_condition (code);
5903
5904 /* Only 64 bit versions of these instructions exist. */
5905 if (mode != DImode)
5906 abort ();
5907
5908 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */
5909
5910 switch (code)
5911 {
5912 case NE:
5913 strcpy (string, "brnz");
5914 break;
5915
5916 case EQ:
5917 strcpy (string, "brz");
5918 break;
5919
5920 case GE:
5921 strcpy (string, "brgez");
5922 break;
5923
5924 case LT:
5925 strcpy (string, "brlz");
5926 break;
5927
5928 case LE:
5929 strcpy (string, "brlez");
5930 break;
5931
5932 case GT:
5933 strcpy (string, "brgz");
5934 break;
5935
5936 default:
5937 abort ();
5938 }
5939
5940 p = strchr (string, '\0');
5941
5942 /* Now add the annulling, reg, label, and nop. */
5943 if (annul && ! far)
5944 {
5945 strcpy (p, ",a");
5946 p += 2;
5947 }
5948
5949 if (insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
5950 {
5951 strcpy (p,
5952 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
5953 ? ",pt" : ",pn");
5954 p += 3;
5955 }
5956
5957 *p = p < string + 8 ? '\t' : ' ';
5958 p++;
5959 *p++ = '%';
5960 *p++ = '0' + reg;
5961 *p++ = ',';
5962 *p++ = ' ';
5963 if (far)
5964 {
5965 int veryfar = 1, delta;
5966
5967 if (INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
5968 {
5969 delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
5970 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
5971 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */
5972 if (delta >= -260000 && delta < 260000)
5973 veryfar = 0;
5974 }
5975
5976 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\t");
5977 if (annul || noop)
5978 p[3] = '6';
5979 p += 11;
5980 if (veryfar)
5981 {
5982 strcpy (p, "b\t");
5983 p += 2;
5984 }
5985 else
5986 {
5987 strcpy (p, "ba,pt\t%%xcc, ");
5988 p += 13;
5989 }
5990 }
5991 *p++ = '%';
5992 *p++ = 'l';
5993 *p++ = '0' + label;
5994 *p = '\0';
5995
5996 if (noop)
5997 strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");
5998
5999 return string;
6000 }
6001
6002 /* Return 1, if any of the registers of the instruction are %l[0-7] or %o[0-7].
6003 Such instructions cannot be used in the delay slot of return insn on v9.
6004 If TEST is 0, also rename all %i[0-7] registers to their %o[0-7] counterparts.
6005 */
6006
6007 static int
6008 epilogue_renumber (where, test)
6009 register rtx *where;
6010 int test;
6011 {
6012 register const char *fmt;
6013 register int i;
6014 register enum rtx_code code;
6015
6016 if (*where == 0)
6017 return 0;
6018
6019 code = GET_CODE (*where);
6020
6021 switch (code)
6022 {
6023 case REG:
6024 if (REGNO (*where) >= 8 && REGNO (*where) < 24) /* oX or lX */
6025 return 1;
6026 if (! test && REGNO (*where) >= 24 && REGNO (*where) < 32)
6027 *where = gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (*where), OUTGOING_REGNO (REGNO(*where)));
6028 case SCRATCH:
6029 case CC0:
6030 case PC:
6031 case CONST_INT:
6032 case CONST_DOUBLE:
6033 return 0;
6034
6035 /* Do not replace the frame pointer with the stack pointer because
6036 it can cause the delayed instruction to load below the stack.
6037 This occurs when instructions like:
6038
6039 (set (reg/i:SI 24 %i0)
6040 (mem/f:SI (plus:SI (reg/f:SI 30 %fp)
6041 (const_int -20 [0xffffffec])) 0))
6042
6043 are in the return delayed slot. */
6044 case PLUS:
6045 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
6046 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
6047 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 1)) != CONST_INT
6048 || INTVAL (XEXP (*where, 1)) < SPARC_STACK_BIAS))
6049 return 1;
6050 break;
6051
6052 case MEM:
6053 if (SPARC_STACK_BIAS
6054 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
6055 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
6056 return 1;
6057 break;
6058
6059 default:
6060 break;
6061 }
6062
6063 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6064
6065 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6066 {
6067 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6068 {
6069 register int j;
6070 for (j = XVECLEN (*where, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6071 if (epilogue_renumber (&(XVECEXP (*where, i, j)), test))
6072 return 1;
6073 }
6074 else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
6075 && epilogue_renumber (&(XEXP (*where, i)), test))
6076 return 1;
6077 }
6078 return 0;
6079 }
6080 \f
6081 /* Leaf functions and non-leaf functions have different needs. */
6082
6083 static const int
6084 reg_leaf_alloc_order[] = REG_LEAF_ALLOC_ORDER;
6085
6086 static const int
6087 reg_nonleaf_alloc_order[] = REG_ALLOC_ORDER;
6088
6089 static const int *const reg_alloc_orders[] = {
6090 reg_leaf_alloc_order,
6091 reg_nonleaf_alloc_order};
6092
6093 void
6094 order_regs_for_local_alloc ()
6095 {
6096 static int last_order_nonleaf = 1;
6097
6098 if (regs_ever_live[15] != last_order_nonleaf)
6099 {
6100 last_order_nonleaf = !last_order_nonleaf;
6101 memcpy ((char *) reg_alloc_order,
6102 (const char *) reg_alloc_orders[last_order_nonleaf],
6103 FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof (int));
6104 }
6105 }
6106 \f
6107 /* Return 1 if REG and MEM are legitimate enough to allow the various
6108 mem<-->reg splits to be run. */
6109
6110 int
6111 sparc_splitdi_legitimate (reg, mem)
6112 rtx reg;
6113 rtx mem;
6114 {
6115 /* Punt if we are here by mistake. */
6116 if (! reload_completed)
6117 abort ();
6118
6119 /* We must have an offsettable memory reference. */
6120 if (! offsettable_memref_p (mem))
6121 return 0;
6122
6123 /* If we have legitimate args for ldd/std, we do not want
6124 the split to happen. */
6125 if ((REGNO (reg) % 2) == 0
6126 && mem_min_alignment (mem, 8))
6127 return 0;
6128
6129 /* Success. */
6130 return 1;
6131 }
6132
6133 /* Return 1 if x and y are some kind of REG and they refer to
6134 different hard registers. This test is guaranteed to be
6135 run after reload. */
6136
6137 int
6138 sparc_absnegfloat_split_legitimate (x, y)
6139 rtx x, y;
6140 {
6141 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
6142 return 0;
6143 if (GET_CODE (y) != REG)
6144 return 0;
6145 if (REGNO (x) == REGNO (y))
6146 return 0;
6147 return 1;
6148 }
6149
6150 /* Return 1 if REGNO (reg1) is even and REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1.
6151 This makes them candidates for using ldd and std insns.
6152
6153 Note reg1 and reg2 *must* be hard registers. */
6154
6155 int
6156 registers_ok_for_ldd_peep (reg1, reg2)
6157 rtx reg1, reg2;
6158 {
6159 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */
6160 if (GET_CODE (reg1) != REG || GET_CODE (reg2) != REG)
6161 return 0;
6162
6163 if (REGNO (reg1) % 2 != 0)
6164 return 0;
6165
6166 /* Integer ldd is deprecated in SPARC V9 */
6167 if (TARGET_V9 && REGNO (reg1) < 32)
6168 return 0;
6169
6170 return (REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1);
6171 }
6172
6173 /* Return 1 if the addresses in mem1 and mem2 are suitable for use in
6174 an ldd or std insn.
6175
6176 This can only happen when addr1 and addr2, the addresses in mem1
6177 and mem2, are consecutive memory locations (addr1 + 4 == addr2).
6178 addr1 must also be aligned on a 64-bit boundary.
6179
6180 Also iff dependent_reg_rtx is not null it should not be used to
6181 compute the address for mem1, i.e. we cannot optimize a sequence
6182 like:
6183 ld [%o0], %o0
6184 ld [%o0 + 4], %o1
6185 to
6186 ldd [%o0], %o0
6187 nor:
6188 ld [%g3 + 4], %g3
6189 ld [%g3], %g2
6190 to
6191 ldd [%g3], %g2
6192
6193 But, note that the transformation from:
6194 ld [%g2 + 4], %g3
6195 ld [%g2], %g2
6196 to
6197 ldd [%g2], %g2
6198 is perfectly fine. Thus, the peephole2 patterns always pass us
6199 the destination register of the first load, never the second one.
6200
6201 For stores we don't have a similar problem, so dependent_reg_rtx is
6202 NULL_RTX. */
6203
6204 int
6205 mems_ok_for_ldd_peep (mem1, mem2, dependent_reg_rtx)
6206 rtx mem1, mem2, dependent_reg_rtx;
6207 {
6208 rtx addr1, addr2;
6209 unsigned int reg1;
6210 int offset1;
6211
6212 /* The mems cannot be volatile. */
6213 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem1) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem2))
6214 return 0;
6215
6216 /* MEM1 should be aligned on a 64-bit boundary. */
6217 if (MEM_ALIGN (mem1) < 64)
6218 return 0;
6219
6220 addr1 = XEXP (mem1, 0);
6221 addr2 = XEXP (mem2, 0);
6222
6223 /* Extract a register number and offset (if used) from the first addr. */
6224 if (GET_CODE (addr1) == PLUS)
6225 {
6226 /* If not a REG, return zero. */
6227 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 0)) != REG)
6228 return 0;
6229 else
6230 {
6231 reg1 = REGNO (XEXP (addr1, 0));
6232 /* The offset must be constant! */
6233 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 1)) != CONST_INT)
6234 return 0;
6235 offset1 = INTVAL (XEXP (addr1, 1));
6236 }
6237 }
6238 else if (GET_CODE (addr1) != REG)
6239 return 0;
6240 else
6241 {
6242 reg1 = REGNO (addr1);
6243 /* This was a simple (mem (reg)) expression. Offset is 0. */
6244 offset1 = 0;
6245 }
6246
6247 /* Make sure the second address is a (mem (plus (reg) (const_int). */
6248 if (GET_CODE (addr2) != PLUS)
6249 return 0;
6250
6251 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 0)) != REG
6252 || GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != CONST_INT)
6253 return 0;
6254
6255 if (reg1 != REGNO (XEXP (addr2, 0)))
6256 return 0;
6257
6258 if (dependent_reg_rtx != NULL_RTX && reg1 == REGNO (dependent_reg_rtx))
6259 return 0;
6260
6261 /* The first offset must be evenly divisible by 8 to ensure the
6262 address is 64 bit aligned. */
6263 if (offset1 % 8 != 0)
6264 return 0;
6265
6266 /* The offset for the second addr must be 4 more than the first addr. */
6267 if (INTVAL (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != offset1 + 4)
6268 return 0;
6269
6270 /* All the tests passed. addr1 and addr2 are valid for ldd and std
6271 instructions. */
6272 return 1;
6273 }
6274
6275 /* Return 1 if reg is a pseudo, or is the first register in
6276 a hard register pair. This makes it a candidate for use in
6277 ldd and std insns. */
6278
6279 int
6280 register_ok_for_ldd (reg)
6281 rtx reg;
6282 {
6283 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */
6284 if (GET_CODE (reg) != REG)
6285 return 0;
6286
6287 if (REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6288 return (REGNO (reg) % 2 == 0);
6289 else
6290 return 1;
6291 }
6292 \f
6293 /* Print operand X (an rtx) in assembler syntax to file FILE.
6294 CODE is a letter or dot (`z' in `%z0') or 0 if no letter was specified.
6295 For `%' followed by punctuation, CODE is the punctuation and X is null. */
6296
6297 void
6298 print_operand (file, x, code)
6299 FILE *file;
6300 rtx x;
6301 int code;
6302 {
6303 switch (code)
6304 {
6305 case '#':
6306 /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot. */
6307 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0)
6308 fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
6309 return;
6310 case '*':
6311 /* Output an annul flag if there's nothing for the delay slot and we
6312 are optimizing. This is always used with '(' below. */
6313 /* Sun OS 4.1.1 dbx can't handle an annulled unconditional branch;
6314 this is a dbx bug. So, we only do this when optimizing. */
6315 /* On UltraSPARC, a branch in a delay slot causes a pipeline flush.
6316 Always emit a nop in case the next instruction is a branch. */
6317 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
6318 && (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
6319 fputs (",a", file);
6320 return;
6321 case '(':
6322 /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot and we are
6323 not optimizing. This is always used with '*' above. */
6324 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
6325 && ! (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
6326 fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
6327 return;
6328 case '_':
6329 /* Output the Embedded Medium/Anywhere code model base register. */
6330 fputs (EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, file);
6331 return;
6332 case '@':
6333 /* Print out what we are using as the frame pointer. This might
6334 be %fp, or might be %sp+offset. */
6335 /* ??? What if offset is too big? Perhaps the caller knows it isn't? */
6336 fprintf (file, "%s+%d", frame_base_name, frame_base_offset);
6337 return;
6338 case 'Y':
6339 /* Adjust the operand to take into account a RESTORE operation. */
6340 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT)
6341 break;
6342 else if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
6343 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
6344 else if (REGNO (x) < 8)
6345 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6346 else if (REGNO (x) >= 24 && REGNO (x) < 32)
6347 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)-16], file);
6348 else
6349 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
6350 return;
6351 case 'L':
6352 /* Print out the low order register name of a register pair. */
6353 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
6354 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
6355 else
6356 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6357 return;
6358 case 'H':
6359 /* Print out the high order register name of a register pair. */
6360 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
6361 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6362 else
6363 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
6364 return;
6365 case 'R':
6366 /* Print out the second register name of a register pair or quad.
6367 I.e., R (%o0) => %o1. */
6368 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
6369 return;
6370 case 'S':
6371 /* Print out the third register name of a register quad.
6372 I.e., S (%o0) => %o2. */
6373 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+2], file);
6374 return;
6375 case 'T':
6376 /* Print out the fourth register name of a register quad.
6377 I.e., T (%o0) => %o3. */
6378 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+3], file);
6379 return;
6380 case 'x':
6381 /* Print a condition code register. */
6382 if (REGNO (x) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
6383 {
6384 /* We don't handle CC[X]_NOOVmode because they're not supposed
6385 to occur here. */
6386 if (GET_MODE (x) == CCmode)
6387 fputs ("%icc", file);
6388 else if (GET_MODE (x) == CCXmode)
6389 fputs ("%xcc", file);
6390 else
6391 abort ();
6392 }
6393 else
6394 /* %fccN register */
6395 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6396 return;
6397 case 'm':
6398 /* Print the operand's address only. */
6399 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
6400 return;
6401 case 'r':
6402 /* In this case we need a register. Use %g0 if the
6403 operand is const0_rtx. */
6404 if (x == const0_rtx
6405 || (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode && x == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (x))))
6406 {
6407 fputs ("%g0", file);
6408 return;
6409 }
6410 else
6411 break;
6412
6413 case 'A':
6414 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6415 {
6416 case IOR: fputs ("or", file); break;
6417 case AND: fputs ("and", file); break;
6418 case XOR: fputs ("xor", file); break;
6419 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%A operand");
6420 }
6421 return;
6422
6423 case 'B':
6424 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6425 {
6426 case IOR: fputs ("orn", file); break;
6427 case AND: fputs ("andn", file); break;
6428 case XOR: fputs ("xnor", file); break;
6429 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%B operand");
6430 }
6431 return;
6432
6433 /* These are used by the conditional move instructions. */
6434 case 'c' :
6435 case 'C':
6436 {
6437 enum rtx_code rc = GET_CODE (x);
6438
6439 if (code == 'c')
6440 {
6441 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
6442 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
6443 rc = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (GET_CODE (x));
6444 else
6445 rc = reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x));
6446 }
6447 switch (rc)
6448 {
6449 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
6450 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
6451 case GE: fputs ("ge", file); break;
6452 case GT: fputs ("g", file); break;
6453 case LE: fputs ("le", file); break;
6454 case LT: fputs ("l", file); break;
6455 case GEU: fputs ("geu", file); break;
6456 case GTU: fputs ("gu", file); break;
6457 case LEU: fputs ("leu", file); break;
6458 case LTU: fputs ("lu", file); break;
6459 case LTGT: fputs ("lg", file); break;
6460 case UNORDERED: fputs ("u", file); break;
6461 case ORDERED: fputs ("o", file); break;
6462 case UNLT: fputs ("ul", file); break;
6463 case UNLE: fputs ("ule", file); break;
6464 case UNGT: fputs ("ug", file); break;
6465 case UNGE: fputs ("uge", file); break;
6466 case UNEQ: fputs ("ue", file); break;
6467 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'c'
6468 ? "invalid %%c operand"
6469 : "invalid %%C operand");
6470 }
6471 return;
6472 }
6473
6474 /* These are used by the movr instruction pattern. */
6475 case 'd':
6476 case 'D':
6477 {
6478 enum rtx_code rc = (code == 'd'
6479 ? reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x))
6480 : GET_CODE (x));
6481 switch (rc)
6482 {
6483 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
6484 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
6485 case GE: fputs ("gez", file); break;
6486 case LT: fputs ("lz", file); break;
6487 case LE: fputs ("lez", file); break;
6488 case GT: fputs ("gz", file); break;
6489 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'd'
6490 ? "invalid %%d operand"
6491 : "invalid %%D operand");
6492 }
6493 return;
6494 }
6495
6496 case 'b':
6497 {
6498 /* Print a sign-extended character. */
6499 int i = trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (x), QImode);
6500 fprintf (file, "%d", i);
6501 return;
6502 }
6503
6504 case 'f':
6505 /* Operand must be a MEM; write its address. */
6506 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
6507 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%f operand");
6508 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
6509 return;
6510
6511 case 's':
6512 {
6513 /* Print a sign-extended 32-bit value. */
6514 HOST_WIDE_INT i;
6515 if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_INT)
6516 i = INTVAL (x);
6517 else if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
6518 i = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x);
6519 else
6520 {
6521 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%s operand");
6522 return;
6523 }
6524 i = trunc_int_for_mode (i, SImode);
6525 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, i);
6526 return;
6527 }
6528
6529 case 0:
6530 /* Do nothing special. */
6531 break;
6532
6533 default:
6534 /* Undocumented flag. */
6535 output_operand_lossage ("invalid operand output code");
6536 }
6537
6538 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
6539 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6540 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
6541 {
6542 fputc ('[', file);
6543 /* Poor Sun assembler doesn't understand absolute addressing. */
6544 if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
6545 fputs ("%g0+", file);
6546 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
6547 fputc (']', file);
6548 }
6549 else if (GET_CODE (x) == HIGH)
6550 {
6551 fputs ("%hi(", file);
6552 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 0));
6553 fputc (')', file);
6554 }
6555 else if (GET_CODE (x) == LO_SUM)
6556 {
6557 print_operand (file, XEXP (x, 0), 0);
6558 if (TARGET_CM_MEDMID)
6559 fputs ("+%l44(", file);
6560 else
6561 fputs ("+%lo(", file);
6562 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 1));
6563 fputc (')', file);
6564 }
6565 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
6566 && (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode
6567 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT))
6568 {
6569 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == 0)
6570 fprintf (file, "%u", (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
6571 else if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == -1
6572 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) < 0)
6573 fprintf (file, "%d", (int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
6574 else
6575 output_operand_lossage ("long long constant not a valid immediate operand");
6576 }
6577 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
6578 output_operand_lossage ("floating point constant not a valid immediate operand");
6579 else { output_addr_const (file, x); }
6580 }
6581 \f
6582 /* Target hook for assembling integer objects. The sparc version has
6583 special handling for aligned DI-mode objects. */
6584
6585 static bool
6586 sparc_assemble_integer (x, size, aligned_p)
6587 rtx x;
6588 unsigned int size;
6589 int aligned_p;
6590 {
6591 /* ??? We only output .xword's for symbols and only then in environments
6592 where the assembler can handle them. */
6593 if (aligned_p && size == 8
6594 && (GET_CODE (x) != CONST_INT && GET_CODE (x) != CONST_DOUBLE))
6595 {
6596 if (TARGET_V9)
6597 {
6598 assemble_integer_with_op ("\t.xword\t", x);
6599 return true;
6600 }
6601 else
6602 {
6603 assemble_aligned_integer (4, const0_rtx);
6604 assemble_aligned_integer (4, x);
6605 return true;
6606 }
6607 }
6608 return default_assemble_integer (x, size, aligned_p);
6609 }
6610 \f
6611 /* Return the value of a code used in the .proc pseudo-op that says
6612 what kind of result this function returns. For non-C types, we pick
6613 the closest C type. */
6614
6615 #ifndef SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
6616 #define SHORT_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_UNIT * 2)
6617 #endif
6618
6619 #ifndef INT_TYPE_SIZE
6620 #define INT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
6621 #endif
6622
6623 #ifndef LONG_TYPE_SIZE
6624 #define LONG_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
6625 #endif
6626
6627 #ifndef LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
6628 #define LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
6629 #endif
6630
6631 #ifndef FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
6632 #define FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
6633 #endif
6634
6635 #ifndef DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
6636 #define DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
6637 #endif
6638
6639 #ifndef LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
6640 #define LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
6641 #endif
6642
6643 unsigned long
6644 sparc_type_code (type)
6645 register tree type;
6646 {
6647 register unsigned long qualifiers = 0;
6648 register unsigned shift;
6649
6650 /* Only the first 30 bits of the qualifier are valid. We must refrain from
6651 setting more, since some assemblers will give an error for this. Also,
6652 we must be careful to avoid shifts of 32 bits or more to avoid getting
6653 unpredictable results. */
6654
6655 for (shift = 6; shift < 30; shift += 2, type = TREE_TYPE (type))
6656 {
6657 switch (TREE_CODE (type))
6658 {
6659 case ERROR_MARK:
6660 return qualifiers;
6661
6662 case ARRAY_TYPE:
6663 qualifiers |= (3 << shift);
6664 break;
6665
6666 case FUNCTION_TYPE:
6667 case METHOD_TYPE:
6668 qualifiers |= (2 << shift);
6669 break;
6670
6671 case POINTER_TYPE:
6672 case REFERENCE_TYPE:
6673 case OFFSET_TYPE:
6674 qualifiers |= (1 << shift);
6675 break;
6676
6677 case RECORD_TYPE:
6678 return (qualifiers | 8);
6679
6680 case UNION_TYPE:
6681 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
6682 return (qualifiers | 9);
6683
6684 case ENUMERAL_TYPE:
6685 return (qualifiers | 10);
6686
6687 case VOID_TYPE:
6688 return (qualifiers | 16);
6689
6690 case INTEGER_TYPE:
6691 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
6692 type. */
6693 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
6694 break;
6695
6696 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
6697 without messing up if the language is not C. We do this by
6698 testing TYPE_PRECISION and TREE_UNSIGNED. The old code used to
6699 look at both the names and the above fields, but that's redundant.
6700 Any type whose size is between two C types will be considered
6701 to be the wider of the two types. Also, we do not have a
6702 special code to use for "long long", so anything wider than
6703 long is treated the same. Note that we can't distinguish
6704 between "int" and "long" in this code if they are the same
6705 size, but that's fine, since neither can the assembler. */
6706
6707 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= CHAR_TYPE_SIZE)
6708 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 12 : 2));
6709
6710 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= SHORT_TYPE_SIZE)
6711 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 13 : 3));
6712
6713 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= INT_TYPE_SIZE)
6714 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 14 : 4));
6715
6716 else
6717 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 15 : 5));
6718
6719 case REAL_TYPE:
6720 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
6721 type. */
6722 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
6723 break;
6724
6725 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
6726 without messing up if the language is not C. */
6727
6728 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) == FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE)
6729 return (qualifiers | 6);
6730
6731 else
6732 return (qualifiers | 7);
6733
6734 case COMPLEX_TYPE: /* GNU Fortran COMPLEX type. */
6735 /* ??? We need to distinguish between double and float complex types,
6736 but I don't know how yet because I can't reach this code from
6737 existing front-ends. */
6738 return (qualifiers | 7); /* Who knows? */
6739
6740 case CHAR_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal CHAR type. Not used in C. */
6741 case BOOLEAN_TYPE: /* GNU Fortran BOOLEAN type. */
6742 case FILE_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal FILE type. */
6743 case SET_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal SET type. */
6744 case LANG_TYPE: /* ? */
6745 return qualifiers;
6746
6747 default:
6748 abort (); /* Not a type! */
6749 }
6750 }
6751
6752 return qualifiers;
6753 }
6754 \f
6755 /* Nested function support. */
6756
6757 /* Emit RTL insns to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
6758 FNADDR is an RTX for the address of the function's pure code.
6759 CXT is an RTX for the static chain value for the function.
6760
6761 This takes 16 insns: 2 shifts & 2 ands (to split up addresses), 4 sethi
6762 (to load in opcodes), 4 iors (to merge address and opcodes), and 4 writes
6763 (to store insns). This is a bit excessive. Perhaps a different
6764 mechanism would be better here.
6765
6766 Emit enough FLUSH insns to synchronize the data and instruction caches. */
6767
6768 void
6769 sparc_initialize_trampoline (tramp, fnaddr, cxt)
6770 rtx tramp, fnaddr, cxt;
6771 {
6772 /* SPARC 32 bit trampoline:
6773
6774 sethi %hi(fn), %g1
6775 sethi %hi(static), %g2
6776 jmp %g1+%lo(fn)
6777 or %g2, %lo(static), %g2
6778
6779 SETHI i,r = 00rr rrr1 00ii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii
6780 JMPL r+i,d = 10dd ddd1 1100 0rrr rr1i iiii iiii iiii
6781 */
6782 #ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
6783 emit_library_call (gen_rtx (SYMBOL_REF, Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
6784 LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
6785 #endif
6786
6787 emit_move_insn
6788 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 0)),
6789 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6790 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, fnaddr,
6791 size_int (10), 0, 1),
6792 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x03000000, SImode)),
6793 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6794
6795 emit_move_insn
6796 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
6797 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6798 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, cxt,
6799 size_int (10), 0, 1),
6800 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x05000000, SImode)),
6801 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6802
6803 emit_move_insn
6804 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
6805 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6806 expand_and (SImode, fnaddr, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
6807 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c06000, SImode)),
6808 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6809
6810 emit_move_insn
6811 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
6812 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
6813 expand_and (SImode, cxt, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
6814 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x8410a000, SImode)),
6815 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
6816
6817 /* On UltraSPARC a flush flushes an entire cache line. The trampoline is
6818 aligned on a 16 byte boundary so one flush clears it all. */
6819 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp))));
6820 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
6821 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
6822 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode,
6823 plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
6824 }
6825
6826 /* The 64 bit version is simpler because it makes more sense to load the
6827 values as "immediate" data out of the trampoline. It's also easier since
6828 we can read the PC without clobbering a register. */
6829
6830 void
6831 sparc64_initialize_trampoline (tramp, fnaddr, cxt)
6832 rtx tramp, fnaddr, cxt;
6833 {
6834 #ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
6835 emit_library_call (gen_rtx (SYMBOL_REF, Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
6836 LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
6837 #endif
6838
6839 /*
6840 rd %pc, %g1
6841 ldx [%g1+24], %g5
6842 jmp %g5
6843 ldx [%g1+16], %g5
6844 +16 bytes data
6845 */
6846
6847 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp),
6848 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x83414000, SImode)));
6849 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
6850 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586018, SImode)));
6851 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
6852 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c14000, SImode)));
6853 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
6854 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586010, SImode)));
6855 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 16)), cxt);
6856 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 24)), fnaddr);
6857 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, tramp))));
6858
6859 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
6860 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
6861 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
6862 }
6863 \f
6864 /* Subroutines to support a flat (single) register window calling
6865 convention. */
6866
6867 /* Single-register window sparc stack frames look like:
6868
6869 Before call After call
6870 +-----------------------+ +-----------------------+
6871 high | | | |
6872 mem | caller's temps. | | caller's temps. |
6873 | | | |
6874 +-----------------------+ +-----------------------+
6875 | | | |
6876 | arguments on stack. | | arguments on stack. |
6877 | | | |
6878 +-----------------------+FP+92->+-----------------------+
6879 | 6 words to save | | 6 words to save |
6880 | arguments passed | | arguments passed |
6881 | in registers, even | | in registers, even |
6882 | if not passed. | | if not passed. |
6883 SP+68->+-----------------------+FP+68->+-----------------------+
6884 | 1 word struct addr | | 1 word struct addr |
6885 +-----------------------+FP+64->+-----------------------+
6886 | | | |
6887 | 16 word reg save area | | 16 word reg save area |
6888 | | | |
6889 SP->+-----------------------+ FP->+-----------------------+
6890 | 4 word area for |
6891 | fp/alu reg moves |
6892 FP-16->+-----------------------+
6893 | |
6894 | local variables |
6895 | |
6896 +-----------------------+
6897 | |
6898 | fp register save |
6899 | |
6900 +-----------------------+
6901 | |
6902 | gp register save |
6903 | |
6904 +-----------------------+
6905 | |
6906 | alloca allocations |
6907 | |
6908 +-----------------------+
6909 | |
6910 | arguments on stack |
6911 | |
6912 SP+92->+-----------------------+
6913 | 6 words to save |
6914 | arguments passed |
6915 | in registers, even |
6916 low | if not passed. |
6917 memory SP+68->+-----------------------+
6918 | 1 word struct addr |
6919 SP+64->+-----------------------+
6920 | |
6921 I 16 word reg save area |
6922 | |
6923 SP->+-----------------------+ */
6924
6925 /* Structure to be filled in by sparc_flat_compute_frame_size with register
6926 save masks, and offsets for the current function. */
6927
6928 struct sparc_frame_info
6929 {
6930 unsigned long total_size; /* # bytes that the entire frame takes up. */
6931 unsigned long var_size; /* # bytes that variables take up. */
6932 unsigned long args_size; /* # bytes that outgoing arguments take up. */
6933 unsigned long extra_size; /* # bytes of extra gunk. */
6934 unsigned int gp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store gp regs. */
6935 unsigned int fp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store fp regs. */
6936 unsigned long gmask; /* Mask of saved gp registers. */
6937 unsigned long fmask; /* Mask of saved fp registers. */
6938 unsigned long reg_offset; /* Offset from new sp to store regs. */
6939 int initialized; /* Nonzero if frame size already calculated. */
6940 };
6941
6942 /* Current frame information calculated by sparc_flat_compute_frame_size. */
6943 struct sparc_frame_info current_frame_info;
6944
6945 /* Zero structure to initialize current_frame_info. */
6946 struct sparc_frame_info zero_frame_info;
6947
6948 /* Tell prologue and epilogue if register REGNO should be saved / restored. */
6949
6950 #define RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM 15
6951 #define HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK (1 << (HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM))
6952 #define RETURN_ADDR_MASK (1 << (RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM))
6953
6954 #define MUST_SAVE_REGISTER(regno) \
6955 ((regs_ever_live[regno] && !call_used_regs[regno]) \
6956 || (regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && frame_pointer_needed) \
6957 || (regno == RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM && regs_ever_live[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM]))
6958
6959 /* Return the bytes needed to compute the frame pointer from the current
6960 stack pointer. */
6961
6962 unsigned long
6963 sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
6964 int size; /* # of var. bytes allocated. */
6965 {
6966 int regno;
6967 unsigned long total_size; /* # bytes that the entire frame takes up. */
6968 unsigned long var_size; /* # bytes that variables take up. */
6969 unsigned long args_size; /* # bytes that outgoing arguments take up. */
6970 unsigned long extra_size; /* # extra bytes. */
6971 unsigned int gp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store gp regs. */
6972 unsigned int fp_reg_size; /* # bytes needed to store fp regs. */
6973 unsigned long gmask; /* Mask of saved gp registers. */
6974 unsigned long fmask; /* Mask of saved fp registers. */
6975 unsigned long reg_offset; /* Offset to register save area. */
6976 int need_aligned_p; /* 1 if need the save area 8 byte aligned. */
6977
6978 /* This is the size of the 16 word reg save area, 1 word struct addr
6979 area, and 4 word fp/alu register copy area. */
6980 extra_size = -STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + FIRST_PARM_OFFSET(0);
6981 var_size = size;
6982 gp_reg_size = 0;
6983 fp_reg_size = 0;
6984 gmask = 0;
6985 fmask = 0;
6986 reg_offset = 0;
6987 need_aligned_p = 0;
6988
6989 args_size = 0;
6990 if (!leaf_function_p ())
6991 {
6992 /* Also include the size needed for the 6 parameter registers. */
6993 args_size = current_function_outgoing_args_size + 24;
6994 }
6995 total_size = var_size + args_size;
6996
6997 /* Calculate space needed for gp registers. */
6998 for (regno = 1; regno <= 31; regno++)
6999 {
7000 if (MUST_SAVE_REGISTER (regno))
7001 {
7002 /* If we need to save two regs in a row, ensure there's room to bump
7003 up the address to align it to a doubleword boundary. */
7004 if ((regno & 0x1) == 0 && MUST_SAVE_REGISTER (regno+1))
7005 {
7006 if (gp_reg_size % 8 != 0)
7007 gp_reg_size += 4;
7008 gp_reg_size += 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
7009 gmask |= 3 << regno;
7010 regno++;
7011 need_aligned_p = 1;
7012 }
7013 else
7014 {
7015 gp_reg_size += UNITS_PER_WORD;
7016 gmask |= 1 << regno;
7017 }
7018 }
7019 }
7020
7021 /* Calculate space needed for fp registers. */
7022 for (regno = 32; regno <= 63; regno++)
7023 {
7024 if (regs_ever_live[regno] && !call_used_regs[regno])
7025 {
7026 fp_reg_size += UNITS_PER_WORD;
7027 fmask |= 1 << (regno - 32);
7028 }
7029 }
7030
7031 if (gmask || fmask)
7032 {
7033 int n;
7034 reg_offset = FIRST_PARM_OFFSET(0) + args_size;
7035 /* Ensure save area is 8 byte aligned if we need it. */
7036 n = reg_offset % 8;
7037 if (need_aligned_p && n != 0)
7038 {
7039 total_size += 8 - n;
7040 reg_offset += 8 - n;
7041 }
7042 total_size += gp_reg_size + fp_reg_size;
7043 }
7044
7045 /* If we must allocate a stack frame at all, we must also allocate
7046 room for register window spillage, so as to be binary compatible
7047 with libraries and operating systems that do not use -mflat. */
7048 if (total_size > 0)
7049 total_size += extra_size;
7050 else
7051 extra_size = 0;
7052
7053 total_size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (total_size);
7054
7055 /* Save other computed information. */
7056 current_frame_info.total_size = total_size;
7057 current_frame_info.var_size = var_size;
7058 current_frame_info.args_size = args_size;
7059 current_frame_info.extra_size = extra_size;
7060 current_frame_info.gp_reg_size = gp_reg_size;
7061 current_frame_info.fp_reg_size = fp_reg_size;
7062 current_frame_info.gmask = gmask;
7063 current_frame_info.fmask = fmask;
7064 current_frame_info.reg_offset = reg_offset;
7065 current_frame_info.initialized = reload_completed;
7066
7067 /* Ok, we're done. */
7068 return total_size;
7069 }
7070 \f
7071 /* Save/restore registers in GMASK and FMASK at register BASE_REG plus offset
7072 OFFSET.
7073
7074 BASE_REG must be 8 byte aligned. This allows us to test OFFSET for
7075 appropriate alignment and use DOUBLEWORD_OP when we can. We assume
7076 [BASE_REG+OFFSET] will always be a valid address.
7077
7078 WORD_OP is either "st" for save, "ld" for restore.
7079 DOUBLEWORD_OP is either "std" for save, "ldd" for restore. */
7080
7081 void
7082 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, base_reg, offset, gmask, fmask, word_op,
7083 doubleword_op, base_offset)
7084 FILE *file;
7085 const char *base_reg;
7086 unsigned int offset;
7087 unsigned long gmask;
7088 unsigned long fmask;
7089 const char *word_op;
7090 const char *doubleword_op;
7091 unsigned long base_offset;
7092 {
7093 int regno;
7094
7095 if (gmask == 0 && fmask == 0)
7096 return;
7097
7098 /* Save registers starting from high to low. We've already saved the
7099 previous frame pointer and previous return address for the debugger's
7100 sake. The debugger allows us to not need a nop in the epilog if at least
7101 one register is reloaded in addition to return address. */
7102
7103 if (gmask)
7104 {
7105 for (regno = 1; regno <= 31; regno++)
7106 {
7107 if ((gmask & (1L << regno)) != 0)
7108 {
7109 if ((regno & 0x1) == 0 && ((gmask & (1L << (regno+1))) != 0))
7110 {
7111 /* We can save two registers in a row. If we're not at a
7112 double word boundary, move to one.
7113 sparc_flat_compute_frame_size ensures there's room to do
7114 this. */
7115 if (offset % 8 != 0)
7116 offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
7117
7118 if (word_op[0] == 's')
7119 {
7120 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
7121 doubleword_op, reg_names[regno],
7122 base_reg, offset);
7123 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7124 {
7125 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
7126 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, regno, offset + base_offset);
7127 dwarf2out_reg_save
7128 (l, regno+1, offset+base_offset + UNITS_PER_WORD);
7129 }
7130 }
7131 else
7132 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
7133 doubleword_op, base_reg, offset,
7134 reg_names[regno]);
7135
7136 offset += 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
7137 regno++;
7138 }
7139 else
7140 {
7141 if (word_op[0] == 's')
7142 {
7143 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
7144 word_op, reg_names[regno],
7145 base_reg, offset);
7146 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7147 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", regno, offset + base_offset);
7148 }
7149 else
7150 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
7151 word_op, base_reg, offset, reg_names[regno]);
7152
7153 offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
7154 }
7155 }
7156 }
7157 }
7158
7159 if (fmask)
7160 {
7161 for (regno = 32; regno <= 63; regno++)
7162 {
7163 if ((fmask & (1L << (regno - 32))) != 0)
7164 {
7165 if (word_op[0] == 's')
7166 {
7167 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
7168 word_op, reg_names[regno],
7169 base_reg, offset);
7170 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7171 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", regno, offset + base_offset);
7172 }
7173 else
7174 fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
7175 word_op, base_reg, offset, reg_names[regno]);
7176
7177 offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
7178 }
7179 }
7180 }
7181 }
7182 \f
7183 /* Set up the stack and frame (if desired) for the function. */
7184
7185 static void
7186 sparc_flat_function_prologue (file, size)
7187 FILE *file;
7188 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
7189 {
7190 const char *sp_str = reg_names[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM];
7191 unsigned long gmask = current_frame_info.gmask;
7192
7193 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file);
7194
7195 /* This is only for the human reader. */
7196 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 0\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
7197 fprintf (file, "\t%s# vars= %ld, regs= %d/%d, args= %d, extra= %ld\n",
7198 ASM_COMMENT_START,
7199 current_frame_info.var_size,
7200 current_frame_info.gp_reg_size / 4,
7201 current_frame_info.fp_reg_size / 4,
7202 current_function_outgoing_args_size,
7203 current_frame_info.extra_size);
7204
7205 size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (size);
7206 size = (! current_frame_info.initialized
7207 ? sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
7208 : current_frame_info.total_size);
7209
7210 /* These cases shouldn't happen. Catch them now. */
7211 if (size == 0 && (gmask || current_frame_info.fmask))
7212 abort ();
7213
7214 /* Allocate our stack frame by decrementing %sp.
7215 At present, the only algorithm gdb can use to determine if this is a
7216 flat frame is if we always set %i7 if we set %sp. This can be optimized
7217 in the future by putting in some sort of debugging information that says
7218 this is a `flat' function. However, there is still the case of debugging
7219 code without such debugging information (including cases where most fns
7220 have such info, but there is one that doesn't). So, always do this now
7221 so we don't get a lot of code out there that gdb can't handle.
7222 If the frame pointer isn't needn't then that's ok - gdb won't be able to
7223 distinguish us from a non-flat function but there won't (and shouldn't)
7224 be any differences anyway. The return pc is saved (if necessary) right
7225 after %i7 so gdb won't have to look too far to find it. */
7226 if (size > 0)
7227 {
7228 unsigned int reg_offset = current_frame_info.reg_offset;
7229 const char *const fp_str = reg_names[HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM];
7230 static const char *const t1_str = "%g1";
7231
7232 /* Things get a little tricky if local variables take up more than ~4096
7233 bytes and outgoing arguments take up more than ~4096 bytes. When that
7234 happens, the register save area can't be accessed from either end of
7235 the frame. Handle this by decrementing %sp to the start of the gp
7236 register save area, save the regs, update %i7, and then set %sp to its
7237 final value. Given that we only have one scratch register to play
7238 with it is the cheapest solution, and it helps gdb out as it won't
7239 slow down recognition of flat functions.
7240 Don't change the order of insns emitted here without checking with
7241 the gdb folk first. */
7242
7243 /* Is the entire register save area offsettable from %sp? */
7244 if (reg_offset < 4096 - 64 * (unsigned) UNITS_PER_WORD)
7245 {
7246 if (size <= 4096)
7247 {
7248 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n",
7249 sp_str, (int) -size, sp_str);
7250 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7251 {
7252 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
7253 fp_str, sp_str, reg_offset);
7254 fprintf (file, "\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
7255 sp_str, (int) -size, fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7256 reg_offset += 4;
7257 }
7258 }
7259 else
7260 {
7261 fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
7262 ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
7263 size, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
7264 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7265 {
7266 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
7267 fp_str, sp_str, reg_offset);
7268 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
7269 sp_str, t1_str, fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7270 reg_offset += 4;
7271 }
7272 }
7273 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7274 {
7275 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
7276 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7277 {
7278 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM,
7279 reg_offset - 4 - size);
7280 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, 0);
7281 }
7282 else
7283 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size);
7284 }
7285 if (gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
7286 {
7287 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
7288 reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM], sp_str, reg_offset);
7289 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7290 dwarf2out_return_save ("", reg_offset - size);
7291 reg_offset += 4;
7292 }
7293 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, reg_offset,
7294 gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
7295 current_frame_info.fmask,
7296 "st", "std", -size);
7297 }
7298 else
7299 {
7300 /* Subtract %sp in two steps, but make sure there is always a
7301 64 byte register save area, and %sp is properly aligned. */
7302 /* Amount to decrement %sp by, the first time. */
7303 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT size1 = ((size - reg_offset + 64) + 15) & -16;
7304 /* Offset to register save area from %sp. */
7305 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset = size1 - (size - reg_offset);
7306
7307 if (size1 <= 4096)
7308 {
7309 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n",
7310 sp_str, (int) -size1, sp_str);
7311 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7312 {
7313 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
7314 fp_str, sp_str, (int) offset, sp_str, (int) -size1,
7315 fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7316 offset += 4;
7317 }
7318 }
7319 else
7320 {
7321 fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
7322 ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
7323 size1, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
7324 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7325 {
7326 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
7327 fp_str, sp_str, (int) offset, sp_str, t1_str,
7328 fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7329 offset += 4;
7330 }
7331 }
7332 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7333 {
7334 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
7335 if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7336 {
7337 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM,
7338 offset - 4 - size1);
7339 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, 0);
7340 }
7341 else
7342 dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size1);
7343 }
7344 if (gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
7345 {
7346 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
7347 reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM], sp_str, (int) offset);
7348 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7349 /* offset - size1 == reg_offset - size
7350 if reg_offset were updated above like offset. */
7351 dwarf2out_return_save ("", offset - size1);
7352 offset += 4;
7353 }
7354 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, offset,
7355 gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
7356 current_frame_info.fmask,
7357 "st", "std", -size1);
7358 fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
7359 ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
7360 size - size1, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
7361 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
7362 if (! (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK))
7363 dwarf2out_def_cfa ("", STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size);
7364 }
7365 }
7366
7367 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 1\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
7368 }
7369 \f
7370 /* Do any necessary cleanup after a function to restore stack, frame,
7371 and regs. */
7372
7373 static void
7374 sparc_flat_function_epilogue (file, size)
7375 FILE *file;
7376 HOST_WIDE_INT size;
7377 {
7378 rtx epilogue_delay = current_function_epilogue_delay_list;
7379 int noepilogue = FALSE;
7380
7381 /* This is only for the human reader. */
7382 fprintf (file, "\t%s#EPILOGUE#\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
7383
7384 /* The epilogue does not depend on any registers, but the stack
7385 registers, so we assume that if we have 1 pending nop, it can be
7386 ignored, and 2 it must be filled (2 nops occur for integer
7387 multiply and divide). */
7388
7389 size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (size);
7390 size = (!current_frame_info.initialized
7391 ? sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
7392 : current_frame_info.total_size);
7393
7394 if (size == 0 && epilogue_delay == 0)
7395 {
7396 rtx insn = get_last_insn ();
7397
7398 /* If the last insn was a BARRIER, we don't have to write any code
7399 because a jump (aka return) was put there. */
7400 if (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE)
7401 insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
7402 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == BARRIER)
7403 noepilogue = TRUE;
7404 }
7405
7406 if (!noepilogue)
7407 {
7408 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT reg_offset = current_frame_info.reg_offset;
7409 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT size1;
7410 const char *const sp_str = reg_names[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM];
7411 const char *const fp_str = reg_names[HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM];
7412 static const char *const t1_str = "%g1";
7413
7414 /* In the reload sequence, we don't need to fill the load delay
7415 slots for most of the loads, also see if we can fill the final
7416 delay slot if not otherwise filled by the reload sequence. */
7417
7418 if (size > 4095)
7419 fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC ", %s\n",
7420 size, t1_str);
7421
7422 if (frame_pointer_needed)
7423 {
7424 if (size > 4095)
7425 fprintf (file,"\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\t\t%s# sp not trusted here\n",
7426 fp_str, t1_str, sp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7427 else
7428 fprintf (file,"\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t\t%s# sp not trusted here\n",
7429 fp_str, (int) size, sp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
7430 }
7431
7432 /* Is the entire register save area offsettable from %sp? */
7433 if (reg_offset < 4096 - 64 * (unsigned) UNITS_PER_WORD)
7434 {
7435 size1 = 0;
7436 }
7437 else
7438 {
7439 /* Restore %sp in two steps, but make sure there is always a
7440 64 byte register save area, and %sp is properly aligned. */
7441 /* Amount to increment %sp by, the first time. */
7442 size1 = ((reg_offset - 64 - 16) + 15) & -16;
7443 /* Offset to register save area from %sp. */
7444 reg_offset = size1 - reg_offset;
7445
7446 fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
7447 ", %s\n\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\n",
7448 size1, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
7449 }
7450
7451 /* We must restore the frame pointer and return address reg first
7452 because they are treated specially by the prologue output code. */
7453 if (current_frame_info.gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
7454 {
7455 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
7456 sp_str, (int) reg_offset, fp_str);
7457 reg_offset += 4;
7458 }
7459 if (current_frame_info.gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
7460 {
7461 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
7462 sp_str, (int) reg_offset, reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM]);
7463 reg_offset += 4;
7464 }
7465
7466 /* Restore any remaining saved registers. */
7467 sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, reg_offset,
7468 current_frame_info.gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
7469 current_frame_info.fmask,
7470 "ld", "ldd", 0);
7471
7472 /* If we had to increment %sp in two steps, record it so the second
7473 restoration in the epilogue finishes up. */
7474 if (size1 > 0)
7475 {
7476 size -= size1;
7477 if (size > 4095)
7478 fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC ", %s\n",
7479 size, t1_str);
7480 }
7481
7482 if (current_function_returns_struct)
7483 fprintf (file, "\tjmp\t%%o7+12\n");
7484 else
7485 fprintf (file, "\tretl\n");
7486
7487 /* If the only register saved is the return address, we need a
7488 nop, unless we have an instruction to put into it. Otherwise
7489 we don't since reloading multiple registers doesn't reference
7490 the register being loaded. */
7491
7492 if (epilogue_delay)
7493 {
7494 if (size)
7495 abort ();
7496 final_scan_insn (XEXP (epilogue_delay, 0), file, 1, -2, 1);
7497 }
7498
7499 else if (size > 4095)
7500 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\n", sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
7501
7502 else if (size > 0)
7503 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n", sp_str, (int) size, sp_str);
7504
7505 else
7506 fprintf (file, "\tnop\n");
7507 }
7508
7509 /* Reset state info for each function. */
7510 current_frame_info = zero_frame_info;
7511
7512 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ();
7513 }
7514 \f
7515 /* Define the number of delay slots needed for the function epilogue.
7516
7517 On the sparc, we need a slot if either no stack has been allocated,
7518 or the only register saved is the return register. */
7519
7520 int
7521 sparc_flat_epilogue_delay_slots ()
7522 {
7523 if (!current_frame_info.initialized)
7524 (void) sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (get_frame_size ());
7525
7526 if (current_frame_info.total_size == 0)
7527 return 1;
7528
7529 return 0;
7530 }
7531
7532 /* Return true if TRIAL is a valid insn for the epilogue delay slot.
7533 Any single length instruction which doesn't reference the stack or frame
7534 pointer is OK. */
7535
7536 int
7537 sparc_flat_eligible_for_epilogue_delay (trial, slot)
7538 rtx trial;
7539 int slot ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7540 {
7541 rtx pat = PATTERN (trial);
7542
7543 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
7544 return 0;
7545
7546 if (! reg_mentioned_p (stack_pointer_rtx, pat)
7547 && ! reg_mentioned_p (frame_pointer_rtx, pat))
7548 return 1;
7549
7550 return 0;
7551 }
7552 \f
7553 /* Adjust the cost of a scheduling dependency. Return the new cost of
7554 a dependency LINK or INSN on DEP_INSN. COST is the current cost. */
7555
7556 static int
7557 supersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep_insn, cost)
7558 rtx insn;
7559 rtx link;
7560 rtx dep_insn;
7561 int cost;
7562 {
7563 enum attr_type insn_type;
7564
7565 if (! recog_memoized (insn))
7566 return 0;
7567
7568 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
7569
7570 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == 0)
7571 {
7572 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
7573 cycles later. */
7574
7575 /* if a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address;
7576 add an extra "cycle". Note that the cost could be two cycles
7577 if the reg was written late in an instruction group; we ca not tell
7578 here. */
7579 if (insn_type == TYPE_LOAD || insn_type == TYPE_FPLOAD)
7580 return cost + 3;
7581
7582 /* Get the delay only if the address of the store is the dependence. */
7583 if (insn_type == TYPE_STORE || insn_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
7584 {
7585 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
7586 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);
7587
7588 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
7589 return cost; /* This should not happen! */
7590
7591 /* The dependency between the two instructions was on the data that
7592 is being stored. Assume that this implies that the address of the
7593 store is not dependent. */
7594 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
7595 return cost;
7596
7597 return cost + 3; /* An approximation. */
7598 }
7599
7600 /* A shift instruction cannot receive its data from an instruction
7601 in the same cycle; add a one cycle penalty. */
7602 if (insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7603 return cost + 3; /* Split before cascade into shift. */
7604 }
7605 else
7606 {
7607 /* Anti- or output- dependency; DEP_INSN reads/writes a register that
7608 INSN writes some cycles later. */
7609
7610 /* These are only significant for the fpu unit; writing a fp reg before
7611 the fpu has finished with it stalls the processor. */
7612
7613 /* Reusing an integer register causes no problems. */
7614 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7615 return 0;
7616 }
7617
7618 return cost;
7619 }
7620
7621 static int
7622 hypersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep_insn, cost)
7623 rtx insn;
7624 rtx link;
7625 rtx dep_insn;
7626 int cost;
7627 {
7628 enum attr_type insn_type, dep_type;
7629 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
7630 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);
7631
7632 if (recog_memoized (insn) < 0 || recog_memoized (dep_insn) < 0)
7633 return cost;
7634
7635 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
7636 dep_type = get_attr_type (dep_insn);
7637
7638 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (link))
7639 {
7640 case 0:
7641 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
7642 cycles later. */
7643
7644 switch (insn_type)
7645 {
7646 case TYPE_STORE:
7647 case TYPE_FPSTORE:
7648 /* Get the delay iff the address of the store is the dependence. */
7649 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
7650 return cost;
7651
7652 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
7653 return cost;
7654 return cost + 3;
7655
7656 case TYPE_LOAD:
7657 case TYPE_SLOAD:
7658 case TYPE_FPLOAD:
7659 /* If a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address. If
7660 the addresses aren't equal, then it might be a false dependency */
7661 if (dep_type == TYPE_STORE || dep_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
7662 {
7663 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET
7664 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (dep_pat)) != MEM
7665 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != MEM
7666 || ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (dep_pat), 0),
7667 XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0)))
7668 return cost + 2;
7669
7670 return cost + 8;
7671 }
7672 break;
7673
7674 case TYPE_BRANCH:
7675 /* Compare to branch latency is 0. There is no benefit from
7676 separating compare and branch. */
7677 if (dep_type == TYPE_COMPARE)
7678 return 0;
7679 /* Floating point compare to branch latency is less than
7680 compare to conditional move. */
7681 if (dep_type == TYPE_FPCMP)
7682 return cost - 1;
7683 break;
7684 default:
7685 break;
7686 }
7687 break;
7688
7689 case REG_DEP_ANTI:
7690 /* Anti-dependencies only penalize the fpu unit. */
7691 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7692 return 0;
7693 break;
7694
7695 default:
7696 break;
7697 }
7698
7699 return cost;
7700 }
7701
7702 static int
7703 sparc_adjust_cost(insn, link, dep, cost)
7704 rtx insn;
7705 rtx link;
7706 rtx dep;
7707 int cost;
7708 {
7709 switch (sparc_cpu)
7710 {
7711 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
7712 cost = supersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
7713 break;
7714 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
7715 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
7716 cost = hypersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
7717 break;
7718 default:
7719 break;
7720 }
7721 return cost;
7722 }
7723
7724 static void
7725 sparc_sched_init (dump, sched_verbose, max_ready)
7726 FILE *dump ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7727 int sched_verbose ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7728 int max_ready ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
7729 {
7730 }
7731
7732 static int
7733 sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface ()
7734 {
7735 if ((1 << sparc_cpu) &
7736 ((1 << PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_CYPRESS) |
7737 (1 << PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC) |
7738 (1 << PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X) | (1 << PROCESSOR_TSC701) |
7739 (1 << PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)))
7740 return 1;
7741 return 0;
7742 }
7743
7744 static int
7745 sparc_use_sched_lookahead ()
7746 {
7747 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
7748 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
7749 return 4;
7750 if ((1 << sparc_cpu) &
7751 ((1 << PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC) |
7752 (1 << PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X)))
7753 return 3;
7754 return 0;
7755 }
7756
7757 static int
7758 sparc_issue_rate ()
7759 {
7760 switch (sparc_cpu)
7761 {
7762 default:
7763 return 1;
7764 case PROCESSOR_V9:
7765 /* Assume V9 processors are capable of at least dual-issue. */
7766 return 2;
7767 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
7768 return 3;
7769 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
7770 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
7771 return 2;
7772 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
7773 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
7774 return 4;
7775 }
7776 }
7777
7778 static int
7779 set_extends (insn)
7780 rtx insn;
7781 {
7782 register rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
7783
7784 switch (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)))
7785 {
7786 /* Load and some shift instructions zero extend. */
7787 case MEM:
7788 case ZERO_EXTEND:
7789 /* sethi clears the high bits */
7790 case HIGH:
7791 /* LO_SUM is used with sethi. sethi cleared the high
7792 bits and the values used with lo_sum are positive */
7793 case LO_SUM:
7794 /* Store flag stores 0 or 1 */
7795 case LT: case LTU:
7796 case GT: case GTU:
7797 case LE: case LEU:
7798 case GE: case GEU:
7799 case EQ:
7800 case NE:
7801 return 1;
7802 case AND:
7803 {
7804 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
7805 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
7806 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
7807 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
7808 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
7809 return 0;
7810 if (sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) == 1)
7811 return 1;
7812 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
7813 }
7814 case IOR:
7815 case XOR:
7816 {
7817 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
7818 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
7819 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG || sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) <= 0)
7820 return 0;
7821 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
7822 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
7823 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
7824 }
7825 case LSHIFTRT:
7826 return GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode;
7827 /* Positive integers leave the high bits zero. */
7828 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7829 return ! (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
7830 case CONST_INT:
7831 return ! (INTVAL (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
7832 case ASHIFTRT:
7833 case SIGN_EXTEND:
7834 return - (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode);
7835 case REG:
7836 return sparc_check_64 (SET_SRC (pat), insn);
7837 default:
7838 return 0;
7839 }
7840 }
7841
7842 /* We _ought_ to have only one kind per function, but... */
7843 static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_diff_list;
7844 static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_list;
7845
7846 void
7847 sparc_defer_case_vector (lab, vec, diff)
7848 rtx lab, vec;
7849 int diff;
7850 {
7851 vec = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, lab, vec);
7852 if (diff)
7853 sparc_addr_diff_list
7854 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_diff_list);
7855 else
7856 sparc_addr_list = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_list);
7857 }
7858
7859 static void
7860 sparc_output_addr_vec (vec)
7861 rtx vec;
7862 {
7863 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
7864 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 0);
7865
7866 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START
7867 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
7868 #endif
7869
7870 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
7871 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
7872 NEXT_INSN (lab));
7873 #else
7874 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
7875 #endif
7876
7877 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
7878 {
7879 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
7880 (asm_out_file, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 0, idx), 0)));
7881 }
7882
7883 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
7884 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
7885 #endif
7886 }
7887
7888 static void
7889 sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (vec)
7890 rtx vec;
7891 {
7892 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
7893 rtx base = XEXP (XEXP (body, 0), 0);
7894 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 1);
7895
7896 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START
7897 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
7898 #endif
7899
7900 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
7901 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
7902 NEXT_INSN (lab));
7903 #else
7904 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
7905 #endif
7906
7907 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
7908 {
7909 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
7910 (asm_out_file,
7911 body,
7912 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 1, idx), 0)),
7913 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (base));
7914 }
7915
7916 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
7917 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
7918 #endif
7919 }
7920
7921 static void
7922 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ()
7923 {
7924 rtx t;
7925 int align;
7926
7927 if (sparc_addr_list == NULL_RTX
7928 && sparc_addr_diff_list == NULL_RTX)
7929 return;
7930
7931 /* Align to cache line in the function's code section. */
7932 function_section (current_function_decl);
7933
7934 align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7935 if (align > 0)
7936 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
7937
7938 for (t = sparc_addr_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
7939 sparc_output_addr_vec (XEXP (t, 0));
7940 for (t = sparc_addr_diff_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
7941 sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (XEXP (t, 0));
7942
7943 sparc_addr_list = sparc_addr_diff_list = NULL_RTX;
7944 }
7945
7946 /* Return 0 if the high 32 bits of X (the low word of X, if DImode) are
7947 unknown. Return 1 if the high bits are zero, -1 if the register is
7948 sign extended. */
7949 int
7950 sparc_check_64 (x, insn)
7951 rtx x, insn;
7952 {
7953 /* If a register is set only once it is safe to ignore insns this
7954 code does not know how to handle. The loop will either recognize
7955 the single set and return the correct value or fail to recognize
7956 it and return 0. */
7957 int set_once = 0;
7958 rtx y = x;
7959
7960 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
7961 abort ();
7962
7963 if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
7964 y = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (x) + WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN);
7965
7966 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7967 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (y)) == 1)
7968 set_once = 1;
7969
7970 if (insn == 0)
7971 {
7972 if (set_once)
7973 insn = get_last_insn_anywhere ();
7974 else
7975 return 0;
7976 }
7977
7978 while ((insn = PREV_INSN (insn)))
7979 {
7980 switch (GET_CODE (insn))
7981 {
7982 case JUMP_INSN:
7983 case NOTE:
7984 break;
7985 case CODE_LABEL:
7986 case CALL_INSN:
7987 default:
7988 if (! set_once)
7989 return 0;
7990 break;
7991 case INSN:
7992 {
7993 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
7994 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
7995 return 0;
7996 if (rtx_equal_p (x, SET_DEST (pat)))
7997 return set_extends (insn);
7998 if (y && rtx_equal_p (y, SET_DEST (pat)))
7999 return set_extends (insn);
8000 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (pat), y))
8001 return 0;
8002 }
8003 }
8004 }
8005 return 0;
8006 }
8007
8008 /* Returns assembly code to perform a DImode shift using
8009 a 64-bit global or out register on SPARC-V8+. */
8010 char *
8011 sparc_v8plus_shift (operands, insn, opcode)
8012 rtx *operands;
8013 rtx insn;
8014 const char *opcode;
8015 {
8016 static char asm_code[60];
8017
8018 /* The scratch register is only required when the destination
8019 register is not a 64-bit global or out register. */
8020 if (which_alternative != 2)
8021 operands[3] = operands[0];
8022
8023 if (GET_CODE (operands[1]) == CONST_INT)
8024 {
8025 output_asm_insn ("mov\t%1, %3", operands);
8026 }
8027 else
8028 {
8029 output_asm_insn ("sllx\t%H1, 32, %3", operands);
8030 if (sparc_check_64 (operands[1], insn) <= 0)
8031 output_asm_insn ("srl\t%L1, 0, %L1", operands);
8032 output_asm_insn ("or\t%L1, %3, %3", operands);
8033 }
8034
8035 strcpy(asm_code, opcode);
8036
8037 if (which_alternative != 2)
8038 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%0, %2, %L0\n\tsrlx\t%L0, 32, %H0");
8039 else
8040 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%3, %2, %3\n\tsrlx\t%3, 32, %H0\n\tmov\t%3, %L0");
8041 }
8042 \f
8043 /* Output rtl to increment the profiler label LABELNO
8044 for profiling a function entry. */
8045
8046 void
8047 sparc_profile_hook (labelno)
8048 int labelno;
8049 {
8050 char buf[32];
8051 rtx lab, fun;
8052
8053 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (buf, "LP", labelno);
8054 lab = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, ggc_strdup (buf));
8055 fun = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, MCOUNT_FUNCTION);
8056
8057 emit_library_call (fun, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, lab, Pmode);
8058 }
8059 \f
8060 #ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
8061 static void
8062 sparc_elf_asm_named_section (name, flags)
8063 const char *name;
8064 unsigned int flags;
8065 {
8066 if (flags & SECTION_MERGE)
8067 {
8068 /* entsize cannot be expressed in this section attributes
8069 encoding style. */
8070 default_elf_asm_named_section (name, flags);
8071 return;
8072 }
8073
8074 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t.section\t\"%s\"", name);
8075
8076 if (!(flags & SECTION_DEBUG))
8077 fputs (",#alloc", asm_out_file);
8078 if (flags & SECTION_WRITE)
8079 fputs (",#write", asm_out_file);
8080 if (flags & SECTION_CODE)
8081 fputs (",#execinstr", asm_out_file);
8082
8083 /* ??? Handle SECTION_BSS. */
8084
8085 fputc ('\n', asm_out_file);
8086 }
8087 #endif /* OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF */
8088
8089 /* We do not allow sibling calls if -mflat, nor
8090 we do not allow indirect calls to be optimized into sibling calls.
8091
8092 Also, on sparc 32-bit we cannot emit a sibling call when the
8093 current function returns a structure. This is because the "unimp
8094 after call" convention would cause the callee to return to the
8095 wrong place. The generic code already disallows cases where the
8096 function being called returns a structure.
8097
8098 It may seem strange how this last case could occur. Usually there
8099 is code after the call which jumps to epilogue code which dumps the
8100 return value into the struct return area. That ought to invalidate
8101 the sibling call right? Well, in the c++ case we can end up passing
8102 the pointer to the struct return area to a constructor (which returns
8103 void) and then nothing else happens. Such a sibling call would look
8104 valid without the added check here. */
8105 static bool
8106 sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall (decl, exp)
8107 tree decl;
8108 tree exp ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8109 {
8110 return (decl
8111 && ! TARGET_FLAT
8112 && (TARGET_ARCH64 || ! current_function_returns_struct));
8113 }
8114
8115 /* ??? Similar to the standard section selection, but force reloc-y-ness
8116 if SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES. Unclear why this helps (as opposed to
8117 pretending PIC always on), but that's what the old code did. */
8118
8119 static void
8120 sparc_aout_select_section (t, reloc, align)
8121 tree t;
8122 int reloc;
8123 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT align;
8124 {
8125 default_select_section (t, reloc | SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES, align);
8126 }
8127
8128 /* Use text section for a constant unless we need more alignment than
8129 that offers. */
8130
8131 static void
8132 sparc_aout_select_rtx_section (mode, x, align)
8133 enum machine_mode mode;
8134 rtx x;
8135 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT align;
8136 {
8137 if (align <= MAX_TEXT_ALIGN
8138 && ! (flag_pic && (symbolic_operand (x, mode)
8139 || SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES)))
8140 readonly_data_section ();
8141 else
8142 data_section ();
8143 }
8144
8145 int
8146 sparc_extra_constraint_check (op, c, strict)
8147 rtx op;
8148 int c;
8149 int strict;
8150 {
8151 int reload_ok_mem;
8152
8153 if (TARGET_ARCH64
8154 && (c == 'T' || c == 'U'))
8155 return 0;
8156
8157 switch (c)
8158 {
8159 case 'Q':
8160 return fp_sethi_p (op);
8161
8162 case 'R':
8163 return fp_mov_p (op);
8164
8165 case 'S':
8166 return fp_high_losum_p (op);
8167
8168 case 'U':
8169 if (! strict
8170 || (GET_CODE (op) == REG
8171 && (REGNO (op) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8172 || reg_renumber[REGNO (op)] >= 0)))
8173 return register_ok_for_ldd (op);
8174
8175 return 0;
8176
8177 case 'W':
8178 case 'T':
8179 break;
8180
8181 default:
8182 return 0;
8183 }
8184
8185 /* Our memory extra constraints have to emulate the
8186 behavior of 'm' and 'o' in order for reload to work
8187 correctly. */
8188 if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
8189 {
8190 reload_ok_mem = 0;
8191 if ((TARGET_ARCH64 || mem_min_alignment (op, 8))
8192 && (! strict
8193 || strict_memory_address_p (Pmode, XEXP (op, 0))))
8194 reload_ok_mem = 1;
8195 }
8196 else
8197 {
8198 reload_ok_mem = (reload_in_progress
8199 && GET_CODE (op) == REG
8200 && REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8201 && reg_renumber [REGNO (op)] < 0);
8202 }
8203
8204 return reload_ok_mem;
8205 }
8206
8207 /* ??? This duplicates information provided to the compiler by the
8208 ??? scheduler description. Some day, teach genautomata to output
8209 ??? the latencies and then CSE will just use that. */
8210
8211 static bool
8212 sparc_rtx_costs (x, code, outer_code, total)
8213 rtx x;
8214 int code, outer_code, *total;
8215 {
8216 switch (code)
8217 {
8218 case PLUS: case MINUS: case ABS: case NEG:
8219 case FLOAT: case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
8220 case FIX: case UNSIGNED_FIX:
8221 case FLOAT_EXTEND: case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
8222 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8223 {
8224 switch (sparc_cpu)
8225 {
8226 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8227 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8228 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (4);
8229 return true;
8230
8231 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8232 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8233 return true;
8234
8235 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8236 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
8237 return true;
8238
8239 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8240 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8241 default:
8242 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8243 return true;
8244 }
8245 }
8246
8247 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8248 return true;
8249
8250 case SQRT:
8251 switch (sparc_cpu)
8252 {
8253 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8254 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8255 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (13);
8256 else
8257 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (23);
8258 return true;
8259
8260 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8261 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8262 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (20);
8263 else
8264 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (29);
8265 return true;
8266
8267 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8268 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (12);
8269 return true;
8270
8271 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8272 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (63);
8273 return true;
8274
8275 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8276 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8277 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
8278 return true;
8279
8280 default:
8281 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (30);
8282 return true;
8283 }
8284
8285 case COMPARE:
8286 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8287 {
8288 switch (sparc_cpu)
8289 {
8290 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8291 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8292 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8293 return true;
8294
8295 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8296 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8297 return true;
8298
8299 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8300 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
8301 return true;
8302
8303 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8304 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8305 default:
8306 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8307 return true;
8308 }
8309 }
8310
8311 /* ??? Maybe mark integer compares as zero cost on
8312 ??? all UltraSPARC processors because the result
8313 ??? can be bypassed to a branch in the same group. */
8314
8315 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8316 return true;
8317
8318 case MULT:
8319 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8320 {
8321 switch (sparc_cpu)
8322 {
8323 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8324 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8325 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (4);
8326 return true;
8327
8328 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8329 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8330 return true;
8331
8332 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8333 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
8334 return true;
8335
8336 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8337 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8338 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8339 return true;
8340
8341 default:
8342 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
8343 return true;
8344 }
8345 }
8346
8347 /* The latency is actually variable for Ultra-I/II
8348 And if one of the inputs have a known constant
8349 value, we could calculate this precisely.
8350
8351 However, for that to be useful we would need to
8352 add some machine description changes which would
8353 make sure small constants ended up in rs1 of the
8354 multiply instruction. This is because the multiply
8355 latency is determined by the number of clear (or
8356 set if the value is negative) bits starting from
8357 the most significant bit of the first input.
8358
8359 The algorithm for computing num_cycles of a multiply
8360 on Ultra-I/II is:
8361
8362 if (rs1 < 0)
8363 highest_bit = highest_clear_bit(rs1);
8364 else
8365 highest_bit = highest_set_bit(rs1);
8366 if (num_bits < 3)
8367 highest_bit = 3;
8368 num_cycles = 4 + ((highest_bit - 3) / 2);
8369
8370 If we did that we would have to also consider register
8371 allocation issues that would result from forcing such
8372 a value into a register.
8373
8374 There are other similar tricks we could play if we
8375 knew, for example, that one input was an array index.
8376
8377 Since we do not play any such tricks currently the
8378 safest thing to do is report the worst case latency. */
8379 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
8380 {
8381 *total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8382 ? COSTS_N_INSNS (34) : COSTS_N_INSNS (19));
8383 return true;
8384 }
8385
8386 /* Multiply latency on Ultra-III, fortunately, is constant. */
8387 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
8388 {
8389 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (6);
8390 return true;
8391 }
8392
8393 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC
8394 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X)
8395 {
8396 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
8397 return true;
8398 }
8399
8400 *total = (TARGET_HARD_MUL ? COSTS_N_INSNS (5) : COSTS_N_INSNS (25));
8401 return true;
8402
8403 case DIV:
8404 case UDIV:
8405 case MOD:
8406 case UMOD:
8407 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8408 {
8409 switch (sparc_cpu)
8410 {
8411 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8412 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8413 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (13);
8414 else
8415 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (23);
8416 return true;
8417
8418 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8419 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8420 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
8421 else
8422 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (20);
8423 return true;
8424
8425 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8426 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8427 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (6);
8428 else
8429 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (9);
8430 return true;
8431
8432 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8433 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8434 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8435 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (8);
8436 else
8437 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (12);
8438 return true;
8439
8440 default:
8441 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
8442 return true;
8443 }
8444 }
8445
8446 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
8447 *total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8448 ? COSTS_N_INSNS (68) : COSTS_N_INSNS (37));
8449 else if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
8450 *total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8451 ? COSTS_N_INSNS (71) : COSTS_N_INSNS (40));
8452 else
8453 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (25);
8454 return true;
8455
8456 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
8457 /* Conditional moves. */
8458 switch (sparc_cpu)
8459 {
8460 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8461 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8462 return true;
8463
8464 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8465 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8466 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8467 else
8468 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8469 return true;
8470
8471 default:
8472 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8473 return true;
8474 }
8475
8476 case MEM:
8477 /* If outer-code is SIGN/ZERO extension we have to subtract
8478 out COSTS_N_INSNS (1) from whatever we return in determining
8479 the cost. */
8480 switch (sparc_cpu)
8481 {
8482 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8483 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND)
8484 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8485 else
8486 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8487 return true;
8488
8489 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8490 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND)
8491 {
8492 if (GET_MODE (x) == QImode
8493 || GET_MODE (x) == HImode
8494 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8495 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8496 else
8497 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8498 }
8499 else
8500 {
8501 /* This handles sign extension (3 cycles)
8502 and everything else (2 cycles). */
8503 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8504 }
8505 return true;
8506
8507 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8508 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
8509 || outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8510 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8511 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (0);
8512 else
8513 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8514 return true;
8515
8516 case PROCESSOR_TSC701:
8517 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8518 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8519 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8520 else
8521 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8522 return true;
8523
8524 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8525 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8526 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8527 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8528 else
8529 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8530 return true;
8531
8532 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8533 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8534 default:
8535 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8536 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8537 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (0);
8538 else
8539 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8540 return true;
8541 }
8542
8543 case CONST_INT:
8544 if (INTVAL (x) < 0x1000 && INTVAL (x) >= -0x1000)
8545 {
8546 *total = 0;
8547 return true;
8548 }
8549 /* FALLTHRU */
8550
8551 case HIGH:
8552 *total = 2;
8553 return true;
8554
8555 case CONST:
8556 case LABEL_REF:
8557 case SYMBOL_REF:
8558 *total = 4;
8559 return true;
8560
8561 case CONST_DOUBLE:
8562 if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8563 && ((XINT (x, 3) == 0
8564 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) XINT (x, 2) < 0x1000)
8565 || (XINT (x, 3) == -1
8566 && XINT (x, 2) < 0
8567 && XINT (x, 2) >= -0x1000)))
8568 *total = 0;
8569 else
8570 *total = 8;
8571 return true;
8572
8573 default:
8574 return false;
8575 }
8576 }
8577
8578 /* Output code to add DELTA to the first argument, and then jump to FUNCTION.
8579 Used for C++ multiple inheritance. */
8580
8581 static void
8582 sparc_output_mi_thunk (file, thunk_fndecl, delta, vcall_offset, function)
8583 FILE *file;
8584 tree thunk_fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8585 HOST_WIDE_INT delta;
8586 HOST_WIDE_INT vcall_offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
8587 tree function;
8588 {
8589 rtx this, insn, funexp, delta_rtx, tmp;
8590
8591 reload_completed = 1;
8592 epilogue_completed = 1;
8593 no_new_pseudos = 1;
8594 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs = 1;
8595
8596 emit_note (NOTE_INSN_PROLOGUE_END);
8597
8598 /* Find the "this" pointer. Normally in %o0, but in ARCH64 if the function
8599 returns a structure, the structure return pointer is there instead. */
8600 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && aggregate_value_p (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (function))))
8601 this = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST + 1);
8602 else
8603 this = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
8604
8605 /* Add DELTA. When possible use a plain add, otherwise load it into
8606 a register first. */
8607 delta_rtx = GEN_INT (delta);
8608 if (!SPARC_SIMM13_P (delta))
8609 {
8610 rtx scratch = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1);
8611 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
8612 sparc_emit_set_const64 (scratch, delta_rtx);
8613 else
8614 sparc_emit_set_const32 (scratch, delta_rtx);
8615 delta_rtx = scratch;
8616 }
8617
8618 tmp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, this, delta_rtx);
8619 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, this, tmp));
8620
8621 /* Generate a tail call to the target function. */
8622 if (! TREE_USED (function))
8623 {
8624 assemble_external (function);
8625 TREE_USED (function) = 1;
8626 }
8627 funexp = XEXP (DECL_RTL (function), 0);
8628 funexp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE, funexp);
8629 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_sibcall (funexp));
8630 SIBLING_CALL_P (insn) = 1;
8631 emit_barrier ();
8632
8633 /* Run just enough of rest_of_compilation to get the insns emitted.
8634 There's not really enough bulk here to make other passes such as
8635 instruction scheduling worth while. Note that use_thunk calls
8636 assemble_start_function and assemble_end_function. */
8637 insn = get_insns ();
8638 insn_locators_initialize ();
8639 shorten_branches (insn);
8640 final_start_function (insn, file, 1);
8641 final (insn, file, 1, 0);
8642 final_end_function ();
8643
8644 reload_completed = 0;
8645 epilogue_completed = 0;
8646 no_new_pseudos = 0;
8647 }
8648
8649 #include "gt-sparc.h"